Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
323i
328i
328xi
335i
335xi
Owner's Manual for Vehicle
Congratulations, and thank you for choosing a BMW.
Thorough familiarity with your vehicle will provide you with
enhanced control and security when you drive it. We therefore
have this request:
Please take the time to read this Owner's Manual and familiarize
yourself with the information that we have compiled for you
before starting off in your new vehicle. It contains important data
and instructions intended to assist you in gaining maximum use
and satisfaction from your BMW's unique range of technical fea-
tures. The manual also contains information on maintenance
designed to enhance operating safety and contribute to main-
taining the value of your BMW throughout an extended service
life.
This manual is supplemented by a Service and Warranty Informa-
tion Booklet for US models or a Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian models.
We wish you an enjoyable driving experience.
BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
© 2007 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the
written consent of BMW AG, Munich.
Order No. 01 41 0 014 254
US English VIII/07, 07 09 500
Printed in Germany
Printed on environmentally friendly paper,
bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic-
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to
page 252.
Using this Owner's Manual
4 Notes
6 Reporting safety defects
At a glance
10 Cockpit
16 iDrive
23 Voice command system
Controls
28 Opening and closing
43 Adjustments
52 Transporting children safely
56 Driving
71 Everything under control
85 Technology for driving comfort and
safety
96 Lamps
100 Climate
106 Practical interior accessories
Driving tips
120 Things to remember when driving
Navigation
128 Starting the navigation system
130 Destination entry
143 Destination guidance
152 What to do if …
Entertainment
156 On/off and settings
160 Radio
166 Satellite radio
169 CD player and CD changer
175 AUX-In port
176 USB-audio interface
Communications
182 Telephoning
197 BMW Assist
Mobility
206 Refueling
208 Wheels and tires
221 Under the hood
226 Maintenance
228 Replacing components
235 Giving and receiving assistance
Reference
242 Technical data
247 Short commands for the voice command
system
252 Everything from A-Z
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Notes
4
Notes
Using this Owner's Manual
We have tried to make all the information in this
Owner's Manual easy to find. The fastest way to
find specific topics is to refer to the detailed
index at the back of the manual. If you wish to
gain an initial overview of your vehicle, you will
find this in the first chapter.
Should you sell your BMW some day, please
remember to hand over the Owner's Manual as
well; it is an important component of your vehi-
cle.
Additional sources of information
Should you have any other questions, your
BMW center will be glad to advise you at any
time.
Information on BMW, e.g. on technical aspects,
can also be found on the Internet at
www.bmwusa.com.
Symbols used
Indicates precautions that must be fol-
lowed precisely in order to avoid the pos-
sibility of personal injury and serious damage to
the vehicle.<
Indicates information that will assist you
in gaining the optimum benefit from your
vehicle and enable you to care more effectively
for your vehicle.<
Refers to measures that can be taken to
help protect the environment.<
< Marks the end of a specific item of informa-
tion.
*
Indicates special equipment, country-spe-
cific equipment and optional extras, as well as
equipment and functions not yet available at the
time of printing.
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to
select individual functions.
{...} Verbal instructions to use with the voice
command system.
{{...}} Identifies the answers generated by the
voice command system.
Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the rel-
evant section of this Owner's Manual for
information on a particular part or assembly.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
5
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
The individual vehicle
When you ordered your BMW, you chose vari-
ous items of equipment. This Owner's Manual
describes the entire array of options and equip-
ment available with a specific BMW model.
Please bear in mind that the manual may con-
tain information on accessories and equipment
that you have not specified for your own vehicle.
Sections describing options and special equip-
ment are marked by asterisks
*
to assist you in
identifying possible differences between the
descriptions in this manual and your own vehi-
cle's equipment.
If equipment in your BMW is not described in
this Owner's Manual, please refer to the accom-
panying Supplementary Owner's Manuals.
Editorial notice
BMW pursues a policy of continuous, ongoing
development that is conceived to ensure that
our vehicles continue to embody the highest
quality and safety standards combined with
advanced, state-of-the-art technology. For this
reason, it is possible in exceptional cases that
features described in this Owner's Manual
could differ from those on your vehicle.
For your own safety
Maintenance and repair
Advanced technology, e.g. the use of
modern materials and powerful electron-
ics, requires specially adapted maintenance
and repair methods. You should therefore have
the corresponding work on your vehicle per-
formed only by your BMW center or at a work-
shop that works according to BMW repair pro-
cedures with correspondingly trained
personnel. If this work is not carried out prop-
erly, there is a danger of subsequent damage
and related safety hazards.<
Parts and accessories
For your own safety, use genuine parts
and accessories approved by BMW.
When you purchase accessories tested and
approved by BMW and Original BMW Parts, you
simultaneously acquire the assurance that they
have been thoroughly tested by BMW to ensure
optimum performance when installed on your
vehicle.
BMW warrants these parts to be free from
defects in material and workmanship.
BMW will not accept any liability for damage
resulting from installation of parts and accesso-
ries not approved by BMW.
BMW cannot test every product made by other
manufacturers to verify if it can be used on a
BMW safely and without risk to either the vehi-
cle, its operation, or its occupants.
Original BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and
other products approved by BMW, together
with professional advice on using these items,
are available from all BMW centers.
Installation and operation of non-BMW
approved accessories such as alarms, radios,
amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspension
components, brake dust shields, telephones,
including operation of any mobile phone from
within the vehicle without using an externally
mounted antenna, or transceiver equipment, for
instance, CBs, walkie-talkies, ham radio or sim-
ilar accessories, may cause extensive damage
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Notes
6
to the vehicle, compromise its safety, interfere
with the vehicle's electrical system or affect the
validity of the BMW Limited Warranty. See your
BMW center for additional information.<
Maintenance, replacement, or repair of
the emission control devices and sys-
tems may be performed by any automotive
repair establishment or individual using any cer-
tified automotive part.<
California Proposition 65 warning
California law requires us to issue the following
warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of
automobile components and parts,
including components found in the interior fur-
nishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects and reproductive harm. In
addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
Battery posts, terminals and related accesso-
ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash
your hands after handling.
Used engine oil contains chemicals that have
caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always
protect your skin by washing thoroughly with
soap and water.<
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly.
Your BMW is covered by the following warran-
ties:
> New Vehicle Limited Warranty
> Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
> Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty
> Federal Emissions Performance Warranty
> California Emission Control System Limited
Warranty
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration,
NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North
America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New
Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831-
1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your dealer, or BMW of
North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-
trator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
7
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada,
Defect Investigations and Recalls, may call
1-800-333-0510 toll-free from anywhere in
Canada or 1-613-993-9851 from the Ottawa
region and from other countries, or contact
Transport Canada by mail at: Transport Can-
ada, ASFAD, Place de Ville, Tower C, 330
Sparks Street, Ottawa, ON, K1A 0N5.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
At a glance
This overview of buttons, switches and displays
is intended to familiarize you with your vehicle's
operating environment. The section will also
assist you in becoming acquainted with the
control concepts and options available for
operating the various systems.
At a glance
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Cockpit
10
Cockpit
Around the steering wheel: controls and displays
3 Folding exterior mirrors in and out
*
49
4 Adjusting exterior mirrors, automatic curb
monitor
*
49
1
Safety switch for electric rear
windows 39
2
Opening and closing windows 38
5
Parking lamps 96
Low beams 96
Automatic headlamp control
*
96
Adaptive Head Light
*
98
6
Fog lamps
*
98
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
At a glance
11
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
8 Instrument cluster 12
11 Ignition lock 56
12 Buttons
*
on the steering wheel
13 Horn: the entire surface
14 Adjusting the steering wheel 50
16 Releasing the hood 221
17 Opening the tailgate/luggage compartment
lid
*
7
Turn signals 60
High beams, headlamp flasher 98
Roadside parking lamps
*
98
Computer 73
Settings and information about the
vehicle 75
Instrument lighting 99
9
Windshield wipers 61
Rain sensor
*
61
Sports Wagon:
Rear window wiper 62
10
Switching the ignition on/off and
starting/stopping the engine 56
Telephone
*
:
> Press: accepting and ending a
call, starting dialing
*
selected
phone numbers. Redialing if
no phone number is selected
> Press longer: redialing
Volume
Activating/deactivating voice com-
mand system
*
23
Changing radio station
Selecting music track
Scrolling through phone book and
lists with stored phone numbers
Individually programmable 50
Individually programmable 50
15
Cruise control
*
63
Active cruise control
*
64
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Cockpit
12
Instrument cluster
1 Speedometer
2 Indicator lamps for turn signals
3 Indicator and warning lamps 13
4 Displays for active cruise control
*
64
5 Tachometer 71
6 Engine oil temperature
*
72
Energy Control
*
72
7 Display for
> Clock 71
> Outside temperature 71
> Indicator and warning lamps 81
8 Display for
> Position of automatic transmission
*
58
> Computer 73
> Date of next scheduled service, and
remaining distance to be driven 76
> Odometer and trip odometer 71
> Checking engine oil level
*
222
> Settings and information 75
> There is a Check Control
message 81
9 Fuel gauge 72
10 Resetting the trip odometer 71
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
At a glance
13
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Indicator and warning lamps
The concept
Indicator and warning lamps can light up in a
variety of combinations and colors.
Some lamps are checked for proper functioning
and thus come on briefly when the engine is
started or the ignition is switched on.
Explanatory text messages
Text messages at the lower edge of the Control
Display explain the meaning of the displayed
indicator and warning lamps.
You can call up more information, e.g. on the
cause of a malfunction and on how to respond,
via Check Control, refer to page 81.
In urgent cases, this information will be shown
as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.
Indicator lamps without text messages
The following indicator lamps notify you that
certain functions are active:
High beams/headlamp flasher 98
Fog lamps
*
98
Lamp flashes:
DSC or DTC is regulating the propul-
sive forces in order to maintain driving
stability 87
Parking brake applied 57
Canada: parking brake applied 57
Engine malfunction with adverse
effect on exhaust emissions 227
Canada: engine malfunction with
adverse effect on exhaust
emissions 227
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Cockpit
14
Around the center console: controls and displays
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
At a glance
15
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
1 Microphone for voice command system
*
and for telephone in hands-free mode
*
2 SOS: initiating an Emergency Request
call
*
235
3 Reading lamps 99
4 Glass roof/panorama glass roof
*
39
5 Interior lamps 99
6 Passenger airbag status lamp
*
95
7 Control Display 16
8 Hazard warning flashers
9 DTC Dynamic Traction Control 87
10 Central locking system 32
11 Automatic climate control
12 Ejecting audio CD 156
13 Changing
> Radio station 160
> Track 170
14 Selecting radio, CD and CD changer
15 Selecting AM or FM waveband
16 Ejecting navigation DVD 128
18 Controller 16
Can be turned, pressed, or moved horizon-
tally in four directions
19 Opening start menu on Control Display 17
20 Drive for navigation DVD 128
21 Programmable memory keys 21
22 Switching audio sources on/off and adjust-
ing volume 156
23 Drive for audio CD 156
Air distribution to the
windshield 101
Air distribution to the upper body
area 101
Air distribution to the footwell 101
Automatic air distribution and flow
rate 102
Cooling function 103
AUC Automatic recirculated-air
control 102
Recirculated-air mode 102
Maximum cooling 102
Residual heat mode 103
Air flow rate 102
Defrosting windows 103
Rear window defroster 103
17
Heated seats
*
47
PDC Park Distance Control
*
85
Sedan:
Roller sun blind
*
109
HDC Hill Descent Control
*
87
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
iDrive
16
iDrive
iDrive integrates the functions of a large num-
ber of switches. This allows these functions to
be operated from a single central position. The
following section provides an introduction to
basic menu navigation. The control of the indi-
vidual functions is described in connection with
the relevant equipment.
Controls
1 Control Display
2 button
Opening start menu
3 Controller
The controller can be used to select menu
items and to adjust settings:
> Move in four directions, arrow 4
> Turn, arrow 5
> Push, arrow 6
Operate the controller only when traffic
and road conditions allow this, to avoid
endangering the car's occupants and other
road users by being distracted.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
At a glance
17
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Menu overview
Communication
> Telephone
*
> BMW Assist
*
or TeleService
*
Navigation
> Navigation system
> Onboard information, e.g. for displaying the
average fuel consumption
Entertainment
> Radio
> CD player and CD changer
*
> AUX-In port, USB-audio interface
*
for
external audio device
Climate
> Vent settings
> Automatic programs
> Parked car operation
menu
> Switching off Control Display
> Tone and display settings
> Settings for your vehicle, e.g. for the central
locking system
> Display of service requirements and dates
for statutory inspections
> Settings for telephone
Operating principle
As of radio readiness, the following message
appears on the Control Display:
To hide the message:
Press the controller.
The start menu is displayed.
The message is automatically hidden after
approx. 10 seconds.
Start menu
All iDrive functions can be called up via five
menu items.
Opening start menu
Press the button.
To open the start menu from the menu:
Press the button twice.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
iDrive
18
Calling up menu items in the start menu
As of radio readiness, refer to page 56:
Via the start menu you can call up the four menu
items of Communication, Navigation, Entertain-
ment and Climate by moving the controller for-
wards, backwards, to the left or to the right.
You can call up the menu by pressing the con-
troller.
Convenient call-up of menu items
The convenient call-up function enables you to:
> Call up a menu item from the start menu in
the view last displayed
> Switch directly between Communication,
Navigation, Entertainment and Climate
without having to press the button
To do so, move the controller in the corre-
sponding direction and hold it for more than
approx. 2 seconds.
Displays in menu
1 Each menu is subdivided into fields. The
active field is highlighted.
2 A symbol indicates the start menu item last
selected.
1 Menu items are usually grouped in horizon-
tal or vertical lists.
2 In these lists, arrows indicate the possibility
of accessing other menu items that are not
currently visible.
3 Settings are represented graphically or as
numerical values.
Communication
Navigation or onboard information
Entertainment
Climate
menu
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
At a glance
19
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Operating principle at a glance
The following is a general description of opera-
tions using iDrive.
For an exemplary step-by-step application refer
to Setting the time, page 79.
1 Selecting a menu item:
> Turn the controller; the highlight marker
moves
> Menu items in white can be selected by
highlighting them
2 Activating a menu item:
> Press the controller
> New menu items are displayed or the
function is executed
3 Selecting a menu item: refer to 1
4 Switching between fields:
> Briefly move the controller to the left,
right, forward, or backward
> Release the controller
> The active field is brighter in color
5 Adjusting settings:
> Turn the controller
> Graphic display, numerical value or text
displays can be changed
> Confirm by changing the field
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
iDrive
20
Status information
1 Display for:
> Entertainment:
Radio, CD or
> Telephone
*
in "Communication":
Name of the connected mobile phone,
network search or no network
> "BMW Assist"
*
:
Active voice connection with a
BMW Assist service
2 Entertainment audio output off
3 Display for traffic information
*
:
"TI":
Traffic information for the navigation sys-
tem can be received and transmission is
switched on
4 Display for:
> New entries present in "Missed calls"
*
> Roaming active
5 It is possible to make calls
*
if the mobile
phone is paired with the vehicle
Reception strength of mobile phone
network, display depending on mobile
phone
6 Time
Other displays:
Status information is temporarily hidden during
Check Control message displays or entries via
the voice command system
*
.
Assistance window*
Additional information can be displayed in the
assistance window:
> The computer or the trip computer
*
> The arrow or map view in vehicles with nav-
igation system
*
> The current position
*
Selecting display
1. Move the controller to the right to change to
the assistance window and press the con-
troller.
2. Select a menu item.
3. Press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
At a glance
21
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Switching assistance window on/off
1. Move the controller to the right to change to
the assistance window and press the con-
troller.
2. Select "Assist. window off" and press the
controller.
To turn back on, switch to the assistance win-
dow and press the controller.
Switching Control Display
off/on
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Display off" and press the control-
ler.
Press the controller to switch on.
Programmable memory keys
Using the programmable memory keys, you can
store and execute certain iDrive functions:
> Navigation destinations
*
> Entertainment:
> Radio stations
> CD
> CD compartment of CD changer
> AUX
> Telephone: phone numbers
The assignment of the programmable memory
keys is stored for the remote control currently in
use.
Storing functions
Navigation destinations*
1. Select the navigation destination, e.g. in the
destination list or address book.
2. ... Press the key longer than
2seconds.
Special features:
> If destination guidance and the map view
have been started, the current destination is
stored.
> If the destination is entered via map, the
coordinates in the crosshairs are stored, not
the current destination.
Telephone, phone numbers
1. Enter the phone number or select the num-
ber from a list of stored phone numbers, e.g.
the A-Z list.
2. ... Press the key longer than
2seconds.
If the phone number is associated with a name,
the name is also stored.
Entertainment
The item stored in the Entertainment menu is
the source that is playing at the time of storage,
e.g. a radio station, irrespective of what was
selected on the Control Display.
1. Select the desired function, e.g. radio sta-
tion or CD.
2. ... Press the key longer than
2seconds.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
iDrive
22
If the car is equipped with two drives and a
CD with compressed audio files is played,
the current track is stored.<
Executing a function
... Press the key.
The function is executed immediately. This
means that, for example, if a phone number is
selected, the connection is established, or if a
navigation destination is called up, destination
guidance is started.
Displaying memory key assignments
You can have the assignment of a memory key
displayed by touching the key with your finger.
Please do not wear gloves when doing so.
Touching the keys with an object such as a pen
will not work.
Displaying brief information
... Touch the key.
The key assignment is displayed.
Navigation destination
Entertainment source
Telephone, phone number
Not assigned
Displaying detailed information
... Touch the key for a longer
period.
Clearing key assignments
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. Select "Programmable Memory Keys" and
press the controller.
6. Select "Delete assignment of all memory
keys" and press the controller.
7. Select "Yes" and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
At a glance
23
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Voice command system
The concept
The voice command system allows you to con-
trol operation of various vehicle systems with-
out removing your hands from the steering
wheel.
Individual menu items on the Control Display
can be spoken as commands. It is not neces-
sary to use the controller.
The voice command system transforms your
oral commands into control signals for the
selected systems and provides support in the
form of instructions or questions.
The voice command system uses a special
microphone located in the area of the interior
rearview mirror, refer to page 14.
Precondition
Via iDrive, select the language in which the
voice command system is operating, so that the
spoken commands can be identified. Selecting
the language for iDrive, refer to page 84.
Symbols in the Owner's Manual
Saying commands
Activating voice command system
1. Press the button on the steering wheel.
This symbol on the Control Display and
an acoustic signal indicate that the voice
command system is ready to receive spo-
ken commands.
2. Say the command.
The command appears on the Control Dis-
play.
This symbol appears on the Control Display
when you can enter additional commands.
If no further commands are possible, continue
by operating the item of equipment via iDrive.
Terminating or canceling voice
command system
Press the button on the steering wheel
or
Commands
Having the possible commands read
aloud
You can have the system read aloud the possi-
ble commands related to the selected menu
*
{...} Say the specified commands word for
word.
{{...}} Indicates responses of the voice
command system.
{Cancel}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Voice command system
24
item on the Control Display.
To have the possible commands read out to
you:
For instance, if you have selected "CD", the
commands available for operating the CD
player and CD changer are read out
*
.
Opening help
Using alternative commands
There are often a number of commands to run a
function, e.g.:
Calling up functions immediately via
short commands
Short commands enable you to perform certain
functions immediately, irrespective of which
menu item is selected, refer to page 247.
Opening the start menu
Example: selecting a track
1. If necessary, switch on entertainment audio
output.
2. Press the button on the steering wheel.
{Options}
{Help}
{Radio on} or {Turn radio on}
{Main menu}
3. {Entertainment}
The system says:
{{Entertainment}}
4. {CD}
The system says:
{{CD on}}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
At a glance
25
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
5. Press the button on the steering wheel.
Notes
For information on voice control of the
telephone, refer also to the separate
Owner's Manual.<
For voice commands, bear in mind the follow-
ing:
> Pronounce the commands and digits
smoothly and at normal volume, avoiding
excessive emphases and pauses. The same
applies to spelling when entering a destina-
tion for navigation.
> Always speak the commands in the lan-
guage of the voice command system.
> When selecting a radio station, use the
standard pronunciation of the station name.
> For entries in the voice-activated phone
book, only use names in the language of the
voice command system and no abbrevia-
tions.
> Keep the doors, windows and glass roof/
panorama glass roof closed to prevent
interference from outside noise.
> Avoid ambient noise in the vehicle while
speaking.
6. Select a track, e.g.:
{Track 1}
The system says:
{{Track 1}}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with
information for complete control of your vehicle.
All features and accessories that are useful for
driving and your safety, comfort and
convenience, are described here.
Controls
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Opening and closing
28
Opening and closing
Keys/remote controls
Each remote control contains a rechargeable
battery that is automatically recharged when it
is in the ignition lock while the car is being
driven. Use each remote control at least twice a
year for longer road trips in order to maintain the
batteries' charge status. In cars with convenient
access
*
, the remote control contains a replace-
able battery, refer to page 38.
The settings called up and implemented when
the car is unlocked depend on which remote
control is used to unlock the car, refer to Per-
sonal Profile, next column.
In addition, information about service require-
ments is stored in the remote control, refer to
Service data in the remote control, page 226.
Integrated key
Press button 1 to release the key.
The integrated key fits the following locks:
> Glove compartment, refer to page 109
> Driver's door, refer to page 31
> Sedan:
Luggage compartment lid, refer to page 33
New remote controls
Your BMW center can supply new remote con-
trols with integrated keys as additional units or
as replacements in the event of loss.
Personal Profile
The concept
You can set many of your BMW's functions to
suit your personal needs and preferences.
Without any action on your part, Personal Pro-
file ensures that most of these settings are
stored for the remote control currently in use.
When you unlock the car, the remote control
used for the purpose is recognized and the set-
tings stored for it are called up and imple-
mented.
This means that your personal settings will be
activated for you, even if in the meantime your
car was used by someone else with another
remote control and the corresponding settings.
The individual settings are stored for up to three
remote controls.
Personal Profile settings
For more information on specific settings, refer
to the specified pages.
> Assignment of programmable memory
keys, refer to page 21
> Response of the central locking system
when the car is unlocked, refer to page 29
> Automatic locking of the vehicle, refer to
page 32
> Automatic call-up
*
of the driver's seat posi-
tion after unlocking, refer to page 47
> Programming buttons
*
on the steering
wheel, refer to page 50
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Controls
29
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
> Triple turn signal activation, refer to
page 61
> Settings for the display on the Control Dis-
play and in the instrument cluster:
> 12h/24h format of the clock, refer to
page 80
> Date format, refer to page 81
> Brightness of the Control Display, refer
to page 84
> Language on the Control Display, refer
to page 84
> Units of measure for fuel consumption,
distance covered/remaining distances,
and temperature, refer to page 76
> Show visual warning for Park Distance Con-
trol PDC
*
, refer to page 85
> Light settings:
> Welcome lamps, refer to page 96
> Pathway lighting, refer to page 97
> Daytime running lamps, refer to page 97
> Automatic climate control: activating/deac-
tivating AUTO program, cooling function
and automatic recirculated-air control, set-
ting temperature, air flow rate and distribu-
tion, refer to page 101 ff
> Entertainment:
> Audio volume, refer to page 157
> Tone control, refer to page 157
> Speed-dependent volume control, refer
to page 157
Central locking system
The concept
The central locking system is ready for opera-
tion whenever the driver's door is closed.
The system simultaneously engages and
releases the locks on the following:
> Doors
> Luggage compartment lid/tailgate
> Fuel filler door
Operating from outside
> Via the remote control
> Via the door lock
> In cars with convenient access
*
, via the
handles on the driver's and front passen-
ger's doors
The anti-theft system is also operated at the
same time. It prevents the doors from being
unlocked using the lock buttons or door han-
dles. In addition, if the remote control is used,
the interior lamps and the door's courtesy
lamps
*
are also switched on or off. The alarm
system
*
is also armed or disarmed.
For further details of the alarm system,
refer to
page 35.
Operating from inside
By means of the button for central locking, refer
to page 32.
In the event of a sufficiently severe accident, the
central locking system unlocks automatically. In
addition, the hazard warning flashers and inte-
rior lamps come on.
Opening and closing:
Using the remote control
Persons or animals in a parked vehicle
could lock the doors from the inside. You
should therefore take the remote control with
you when you leave the vehicle so that the latter
can be opened from outside.<
Unlocking
Press the button.
The interior lamps, the courtesy lamps
*
and the
welcome lamps come on.
You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Opening and closing
30
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Door locks" is selected and press the
controller.
6. Select "Central locking" and press the con-
troller.
7. Select "Unlock button" and press the con-
troller.
8. Select a menu item:
> "All doors"
Press the button once to unlock the
entire vehicle.
> "Driver's door only"
Press the button once to unlock only
the driver's door and the fuel filler door.
Press the button twice to unlock the
entire vehicle.
9. Press the controller.
Convenient opening
Hold the button down.
The windows
and the glass roof
*
/panorama
glass roof
*
are opened.
Locking
Press the button.
Switching on interior lamps
While the car is locked:
Press the button.
You can also use this function to locate your
vehicle in parking garages etc.
Sedan:
Unlocking the luggage compartment
lid
Press the button for approx. 1 second.
The luggage compartment lid opens a short
distance, regardless of whether it was locked or
unlocked.
The luggage compartment lid swings
back and up when opened. Ensure that
there is sufficient clearance. To avoid locking
yourself out by accident, do not place the
remote control in the cargo bay. A previously
locked luggage compartment lid is locked again
after closing.
Before and after each trip, check that the lug-
gage compartment lid has not been inadvert-
ently unlocked.<
Sports Wagon:
Unlocking the tailgate
Press the button for approx. 1 second.
The tailgate opens a short distance, regardless
of whether it was locked or unlocked.
The tailgate swings back and up when opened.
Ensure that there is sufficient clearance. To
avoid locking yourself out by accident, do not
place the remote control in the cargo bay. A
previously locked tailgate is locked again after
closing.
Before and after each trip, check that the tail-
gate has not been inadvertently unlocked.<
If you press the button on the remote
control a second time for a longer period
within three seconds, the roll-up cover is
raised
*
. Before closing the tailgate, press the
roll-up cover downward until it engages.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Controls
31
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Confirmation signals
You can activate or deactivate the confirmation
signals.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Door locks" is selected and press the
controller.
6. Select "Confirmation" and press the con-
troller.
7. Select the desired signal.
8. Press the controller.
The signal is activated.
Malfunctions
The remote control may malfunction due to
local radio waves. If this occurs, unlock and lock
the car at the door lock with the integrated key.
If the car can no longer be locked with a remote
control, the battery in the remote control is dis-
charged. Use the remote control on an
extended trip to recharge the battery, refer to
page 28. The remote control for convenient
access
*
contains a battery that may have to be
changed, refer to page 38.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communications
Commission regulations. Operation is gov-
erned by the following:
FCC ID:
LX8766S
LX8766E
LX8CAS
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
> This device must not cause harmful inter-
ference, and
> This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or
changes to these devices could void the
user's authority to operate this equipment.<
Opening and closing:
Using the door lock
You can set the way in which the car is
unlocked, refer to page 29.
Convenient operation
At the door lock, you can operate the windows
and glass roof
*
/panorama glass roof
*
.
Hold the key in the position for unlocking or
locking.
Watch during the closing process to
ensure that no one is injured. Releasing
the key stops the operation.<
Manual operation
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
lock and unlock the driver's door by turning the
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Opening and closing
32
integrated key to the corresponding limit posi-
tions in the door lock.
Opening and closing:
From inside
This button serves to unlock or lock doors and
the luggage compartment lid/tailgate, but does
not activate the anti-theft system. The fuel filler
door remains unlocked.
Automatic locking
You can also set the situations in which the car
locks:
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Door locks" is selected and press the
controller.
6. Select "Central locking" and press the con-
troller.
7. Select a menu item:
> "Relock door if not opened"
The central locking system automati-
cally locks the vehicle after a short time
when no door has been opened.
> "Lock after driving"
The central locking system automati-
cally locks the vehicle as soon as you
drive off.
8. Press the controller.
The setting is selected.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Unlocking and opening doors
> Either unlock the doors together using the
button for the central locking system and
then pull the door handle above the armrest
or
> pull on the door handle of each door twice:
the first time unlocks the door, the second
time opens it.
Locking
> Use the central locking button to lock all of
the doors simultaneously, or
> press down the safety lock button of a door.
To prevent you from being locked out, the
open driver's door cannot be locked using
the lock button.
Persons or animals in a parked vehicle
could lock the doors from the inside. You
should therefore take the remote control with
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Controls
33
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
you when you leave the vehicle so that the latter
can be opened from outside.<
Luggage compartment lid/
tailgate
In order to avoid damage, make sure there
is sufficient clearance before opening the
luggage compartment lid/tailgate.<
Opening from inside
Press the button: the luggage compartment lid/
tailgate opens unless it has been locked.
Opening from outside
Sedan
Press the button, see arrow, or the button on
the remote control for a longer period. The lug-
gage compartment lid will open slightly. It can
now be swung upwards.
Sports Wagon
Press the button, see arrow, or the button on
the remote control for a longer period. The tail-
gate will open slightly. It can now be swung
upwards.
Press the button, see arrow, or the button on
the remote control a second time for a longer
period within three seconds: the roll-up cover is
raised.
Before closing the tailgate, press the cover
downward until it engages.
Opening manually
Sedan
The integrated key of the remote control, refer
to page 28, fits the luggage compartment lid
lock.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Opening and closing
34
Turn the key all the way to the left: the luggage
compartment lid opens.
If you open the luggage compartment lid
using the key while the alarm system is
armed, the alarm will be triggered. Switching off
an alarm, refer to page 36.<
Sports Wagon
In the event of an electrical malfunction:
1. From the cargo bay, swing the cover on the
tailgate upward.
2. Pull the ring upward. The tailgate is
unlocked.
3. Open the tailgate and close the cover again.
The tailgate is locked as soon as it is pressed
shut.
Locking or unlocking separately
The switch is located in the glove compartment.
1 Locking the luggage compartment lid
2 Unlocking the luggage compartment lid
Locking separately
Push the switch in the direction of arrow 1.
The luggage compartment lid is locked and
cannot be unlocked using the central locking
system.
If you give the remote control without the inte-
grated key to someone else while the glove
compartment is locked, the luggage compart-
ment lid cannot be opened. This is an advan-
tage when valet parking, for example. Locking
the glove compartment, refer to page 110.
Unlocking separately
Push the switch in the direction of arrow 2.
Emergency release
Pull the lever in the cargo bay. The luggage
compartment lid is unlocked.
Closing
The handle recesses on the interior trim of the
luggage compartment lid/tailgate make it easier
to pull down.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Controls
35
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Make sure that the closing path of the
luggage compartment lid/tailgate is clear,
otherwise injuries may result.<
Sedan
Sports Wagon
Sports Wagon: opening and closing the
rear window
Small items can be loaded and unloaded
quickly when the rear window is opened sepa-
rately.
The roll-up cover is raised when the rear
window is opened. Before closing the rear
window, press the roll-up cover downward until
it engages.<
Press the button: the rear window opens
slightly. It can now be swung upwards.
Press the window shut to close it.
Make sure that the corners of any pointed
or sharp-edged cargo are padded if they
could bump against the rear window while the
vehicle is in motion, otherwise the heating ele-
ments of the rear window could be damaged.<
Alarm system*
The concept
The vehicle alarm system responds:
> When a door, the hood or the luggage com-
partment lid/tailgate is opened
> To movements inside the vehicle: Interior
motion sensor, refer to page 36
> When the car's inclination changes, for
instance if an attempt is made to jack it up
and steal the wheels or to raise it prior to
towing away
> When there is an interruption in the power
supply from the battery
The alarm system signals unauthorized entry
attempts for a short time by means of:
> An acoustic alarm
> Switching on the hazard warning flashers
> Flashing the high beams
Arming and disarming
When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with
the remote control or at the door lock, the alarm
system is armed or disarmed at the same time.
You can open the luggage compartment lid/tail-
gate even when the alarm system is armed, by
pressing the button on the remote control,
refer to page 30. The lid is locked and moni-
tored again as soon as you close it.
Panic mode*
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation:
Press the button for at least three seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Opening and closing
36
Switching off an alarm
> Unlock the car with the remote control, refer
to page 29.
> Insert the remote control all the way into the
ignition lock.
Indicator lamp displays
> The indicator lamp under the inside rear-
view mirror flashes continuously: the sys-
tem is armed.
> The indicator lamp flashes after locking:
doors, hood, luggage compartment lid/tail-
gate or rear window are not properly closed.
Even if you do not close the alerted area, the
system begins to monitor the remaining
areas, and the indicator lamp flashes con-
tinuously after approx. 10 seconds. The
interior motion sensor and the tilt alarm
sensor are not activated.
> The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking:
your vehicle has not been disturbed while
you were away.
> If the indicator lamp flashes after unlocking
until the remote control is inserted in the
ignition, but for no longer than approx.
5 minutes: your vehicle has been disturbed
while you were away.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. The alarm
system reacts, e.g. to attempts to steal a wheel
or tow the vehicle.
Interior motion sensor
In order for the interior motion sensor to func-
tion properly, the windows and glass roof must
be completely closed
*
.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
may be switched off at the same time. This pre-
vents unintentional alarms, e.g. in the following
situations:
> In duplex garages
> During transport on car-carrying trains,
boats/ships or on a trailer
> When animals are to remain in the vehicle
Switching off tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
Press the button on the remote control
again as soon as the vehicle is locked.
The indicator lamp lights up briefly and then
flashes continuously. The tilt alarm sensor and
the interior motion sensor are switched off until
the next time the vehicle is unlocked and subse-
quently locked again.
Convenient access*
Convenient access enables you to enter your
vehicle without needing to hold the remote con-
trol in your hand. All you need to do is wear the
remote control close to your body, e.g. in your
jacket pocket. The vehicle detects the corre-
sponding remote control within the immediate
vicinity or in the passenger compartment.
Convenient access supports the following
functions:
> Unlocking/locking the vehicle
> Unlocking the luggage compartment lid/
tailgate separately
> Engine starting
> Convenient closure
Functional requirement
> The vehicle or the luggage compartment
lid/tailgate can only be locked when the
vehicle detects that the remote control cur-
rently in use is outside of the vehicle.
> The vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked
again until after approx. 2 seconds.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Controls
37
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
> The engine can only be started when the
vehicle detects that the remote control cur-
rently in use is inside the vehicle.
Comparison to the standard remote
control
In general, there is no difference between using
convenient access or pressing the buttons on
the remote control to carry out the functions
mentioned above. You should therefore first
familiarize yourself with the instructions on
opening and closing starting on page 28.
Special features regarding the use of conve-
nient access are described below.
If you notice a brief delay while opening or
closing windows or the glass roof/pan-
orama glass roof, the system is checking
whether a remote control is inside the vehicle.
Please repeat the opening or closing proce-
dure, if necessary.<
Unlocking
Grasp the handle on the driver's or front pas-
senger's door completely, arrow 1. This corre-
sponds to pressing the button.
Locking
Touch the surface, arrow 2, with your finger for
approx. 1 second. This corresponds to pressing
the button.
To preserve the battery, please make
sure that the ignition and all electrical
consumers are switched off before locking the
vehicle.<
Convenient closure
For convenient closure, keep your finger on the
surface, arrow 2.
Unlocking the luggage compartment
lid/tailgate separately
Press the button on the outside of the luggage
compartment lid/tailgate. This corresponds to
pressing the button.
If the vehicle detects that a remote con-
trol has been accidentally left inside the
locked vehicle's cargo bay after the luggage
compartment lid/tailgate or rear window is
closed, the lid will reopen. The hazard warning
flashers flash and an acoustic signal
*
sounds.<
Switching on radio readiness
Radio readiness is switched on by pressing the
start/stop button, refer to page 56.
Do not depress the brake or the clutch,
otherwise the engine will start.<
Starting the engine
You can start the engine or switch on the igni-
tion when a remote control is inside the vehicle.
It is not necessary to insert a remote control into
the ignition switch, refer to page 56.
Switching off the engine in cars with
automatic transmission
The engine can only be switched off when the
selector lever is in position P, refer to page 57.
To switch the engine off when the selector lever
is in position N, the remote control must be in
the ignition switch.
Before driving a vehicle with automatic
transmission into a car wash
1. Insert remote control into ignition switch.
2. Depress the brake.
3. Move the selector lever to position N.
4. Switch off the engine.
The vehicle can roll.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Opening and closing
38
Malfunction
Convenient access may malfunction due to
local radio waves. If this happens, open or close
the vehicle via the buttons on the remote con-
trol or using the integrated key. To start the
engine afterward, insert the remote control into
the ignition switch.
Warning lamps
The warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when you attempt to
start the engine: the engine cannot
be started. The remote control is not inside the
vehicle or is malfunctioning. Take the remote
control with you inside the vehicle or have it
checked. If necessary, insert another remote
control into the ignition switch.
The warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up while the engine is
running: the remote control is no
longer inside the vehicle. After the engine is
switched off, the engine can only be restarted
within approx. 10 seconds.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster comes on and a message
appears on the Control Display:
replace the battery in the remote control.
Replacing the battery
The remote control for convenient access con-
tains a battery that will need to be replaced from
time to time.
1. Take the integrated key out of the remote
control, refer to page 28.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Insert the new battery with the plus side fac-
ing up.
4. Press the cover on to close.
Take the old battery to a battery collec-
tion point or to your BMW center.<
Windows
To prevent injuries, watch the windows
while closing them.
Take the remote control with you when you
leave the car, otherwise children could operate
the electric windows and possibly injure them-
selves.<
Opening, closing
> Press the switch to the resistance point:
The window opens as long as you press the
switch.
> Press the switch beyond the resistance
point:
The window opens automatically. Press the
switch again to stop the opening move-
ment.
You can close the windows in the same manner
by pulling the switch.
There are separate switches in the rear seat
armrests.
After switching off the ignition
When the remote control is removed or the igni-
tion is switched off, you can still operate the
windows for approx. 1 minute as long as no
door is opened.
For information on convenient operation via the
remote control or the door lock, refer to page 29
or 31. For information on closing with conve-
nient access, refer to Locking on page 30.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Controls
39
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Pinch protection system
If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a
window closes, the closing action is interrupted
and the window reopens slightly.
Despite the pinch protection system
check and clear the window's travel path
prior to closing it, otherwise the safety system
might fail to detect certain kinds of obstruc-
tions, such as thin objects, and the window
would continue closing.
Do not install any accessories that might inter-
fere with window movement. Otherwise the
pinch protection system could be impaired.<
Closing without pinch protection
If there is an external danger, or if ice on the win-
dows, etc., prevents you from closing the win-
dows normally, proceed as follows:
1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and
hold it there. Pinch protection is limited and
the window reopens slightly if the closing
force exceeds a certain value.
2. Pull the switch again past the resistance
point within approx. 4 seconds and hold it
there. The window closes without pinch
protection.
Safety switch
With the safety switch, you can prevent the rear
windows from being opened or closed via the
switches in the rear passenger area, by chil-
dren, for example. When the safety function is
switched on, the LED comes on.
Always press the safety switch when chil-
dren ride in the rear, otherwise
unchecked closing of the windows could lead to
injuries.<
Sedan: glass roof*, electric
To prevent injuries, watch the glass roof
while closing it.
Take the remote control with you when you
leave the car, otherwise children could operate
the roof and possibly injure themselves.<
Raising
Press the switch.
> The closed glass roof is raised and the slid-
ing visor opens slightly.
> The open glass roof automatically travels
into the raised position. The sliding visor
remains completely open.
Opening, closing
> Press the switch backwards to the resis-
tance point.
The glass roof and the sliding visor open
together as long as you hold the switch in
this position.
> Press the switch backwards past the resis-
tance point.
The glass roof and the sliding visor open
automatically. Briefly press the switch again
to stop the opening movement.
You can close the glass roof in a similar manner
by pressing the switch forwards. The sliding
visor remains open and can be closed by hand.
For information on convenient operation via the
remote control or door lock, refer to page 29
or 31.
After switching off the ignition
When the remote control is removed or the igni-
tion is switched off, you can still operate the roof
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Opening and closing
40
for approx. 1 minute as long as no door has
been opened.
Pinch protection system
If the glass roof encounters an obstruction dur-
ing closing from approximately the middle of
the opening in the roof, or during closing from
the raised position, the closing movement is
interrupted and the glass roof is opened again
slightly.
Despite the pinch protection system
check and clear the roof's travel path prior
to closing it, otherwise the safety system might
fail to detect certain kinds of obstructions, such
as very thin objects, and the roof would con-
tinue closing.<
Closing without pinch protection
If there is an external danger, press the switch
forward past the resistance point. The roof
closes without pinch protection.
Following interruptions in electrical
power supply
After a power failure, there is a possibility that
the glass roof can only be raised. The system
must be initialized. BMW recommends having
this work done by your BMW center.
Closing manually*
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
move the glass roof manually:
1. Unclip the front of the cover of the interior
lamps using the screwdriver from the
onboard tool kit, refer to page 228.
2. Insert the screwdriver into the openings on
each side to press the clips.
3. Remove the control unit.
4. Unplug the motor. Considerably less effort
will be required for manual operation.
5. Insert the Allen wrench
*
supplied with the
onboard tool kit, refer to page 228, into the
opening provided. Move the glass roof in
the desired direction.
6. Reinstall the control unit and reattach the
lamp cover.
Sports Wagon:
Panorama glass roof*
To prevent injuries, exercise care when
closing the panorama glass roof and keep
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Controls
41
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
it in your field of vision until it is shut.
Take the remote control with you when you
leave the car, otherwise children could operate
the roof and possibly injure themselves.<
Raising
Press the switch.
The closed roof is raised and the sliding visor
opens slightly.
Do not close the sliding visor forcibly with
the roof in the raised position, as this
would damage the mechanism.<
Opening, closing
Sliding visor
The sliding visor can be opened or closed sep-
arately when the roof is in the closed or raised
position.
> Press the switch backwards to the resis-
tance point.
The sliding visor opens as long as you keep
the switch in this position.
> Tap the switch backwards past the resis-
tance point.
The sliding visor opens automatically. Tap-
ping the switch again stops the operation.
You can close the sliding visor in a similar man-
ner by pressing the switch forwards.
Panorama glass roof
When the sliding visor is open, proceed as
described under Sliding visor.
For information on convenient operation via the
remote control or door lock, refer to page 30
or 31.
Opening and closing the roof and
sliding visor at the same time
Tap the switch twice in quick succession
beyond the resistance point.
Tapping the switch again stops the operation.
Convenience functions
> With the roof open, press the switch twice:
The roof is raised.
> With the roof open, tap the switch twice in
the direction for opening:
The roof is opened fully.
Comfort position
In the comfort position, the roof is not com-
pletely open, thus reducing wind noise in the
passenger compartment.
Each time the panorama glass roof is opened or
closed completely, it stops in the comfort posi-
tion. If desired, continue the movement by
pressing the switch.
After switching off the ignition
When the remote control is removed or the igni-
tion is switched off, you can still operate the roof
for approx. 1 minute as long as no door has
been opened.
Pinch protection system
If the panorama glass roof or the sliding visor
encounters an obstruction while closing from a
position about two-thirds closed, or during
closing from the raised position, the closing
movement is interrupted and the panorama
glass roof and the sliding visor are opened again
slightly.
Despite the pinch protection system
check and clear the roof's travel path prior
to closing it, otherwise the safety system might
fail to detect certain kinds of obstructions, such
as very thin objects, and the roof would con-
tinue closing.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Opening and closing
42
Closing without pinch protection
If there is an external danger, press the switch
forward past the resistance point and hold it
there. The roof closes without pinch protection.
Following interruptions in electrical
power supply
After a power failure, there is a possibility that
the panorama glass roof can only be raised. The
system must be initialized. BMW recommends
having this work done by your BMW center.
Closing manually*
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
move the panorama glass roof manually:
1. Unclip the front of the cover of the interior
lamps using the screwdriver from the
onboard tool kit, refer to page 228.
2. Insert the screwdriver into the openings on
each side to press the clips.
3. Remove the control unit.
4. Unplug the motor. Considerably less effort
will be required for manual operation.
5. Insert the Allen wrench
*
supplied with the
onboard tool kit, refer to page 228, into the
opening provided. Move the panorama
glass roof in the desired direction.
6. Reinstall the control unit and reattach the
lamp cover.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Controls
43
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Adjustments
Sitting safely
The ideal sitting position can make a vital con-
tribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. In con-
junction with the safety belts, the head
restraints and the airbags, the seated position
has a major influence on your safety in the event
of an accident. To ensure that the safety sys-
tems operate with optimal efficiency, we
strongly urge you to observe the instructions
contained in the following section.
For additional information on transporting chil-
dren safely, refer to page 52.
Airbags
Always maintain an adequate distance
between yourself and the airbags. Always
grip the steering wheel on the rim, with your
hands in the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions,
to minimize the risk of injury to the hands or
arms in the event of the airbag being triggered
off.
No one and nothing is to come between the air-
bags and the seat occupant.
Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the
front passenger side as a storage area. Make
sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly,
e.g. not resting feet or legs on the dashboard,
otherwise leg injuries can occur if the front air-
bag is triggered.
Make sure that passengers do not lean their
heads against the side or head airbags, other-
wise serious injuries could result if the airbags
suddenly deployed.<
Even if you follow all the instructions, injuries
resulting from contact with airbags cannot be
fully excluded, depending on the circum-
stances. The ignition and inflation noise may
provoke a mild hearing loss in extremely sensi-
tive individuals. This effect is usually only tem-
porary.
For airbag locations and additional information
on airbags, refer to page 94.
Head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of neck injury in the event of an accident.
Adjust the head restraint in such a way
that its center is at approx. ear level. Oth-
erwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the
event of an accident.<
Head restraints, refer to page 45.
Safety belt
Before every drive, make sure that all occupants
wear their safety belts. Airbags complement the
safety belt as an additional safety device, but
they do not represent a substitute.
Your vehicle has five seats, each of which is
equipped with a safety belt.
Never allow more than one person to
wear a single safety belt. Never allow
infants or small children to ride in a passenger's
lap. Make sure that the belt in the lap area sits
low across the hips and does not press against
the abdomen.
The safety belt must not rest against the throat,
run across sharp edges, pass over hard or frag-
ile objects or be pinched. Fasten the safety belt
so that it sits as snugly as possible against the
lap and shoulder without being twisted. Other-
wise the belt could slide over your hips and
injure your abdomen in the event of a frontal
collision.
Avoid wearing bulky clothing and regularly pull
the belt in the upper-body area taut, otherwise
its restraining effect could be impaired.
Sports Wagon: if the rear center safety belt is
used, the wider backrest must be locked in
place, refer to page 114. Otherwise the safety
belt will have no restraining effect.<
Safety belts, refer to page 48.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Adjustments
44
Seats
Note before adjusting
Never attempt to adjust your seat while
the vehicle is moving. The seat could
respond with unexpected movement, and the
ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
On the front passenger seat as well, do not
incline the backrest too far to the rear while the
vehicle is being driven, otherwise there is a dan-
ger in the event of an accident of sliding under
the safety belt, eliminating the protection nor-
mally provided by the belt.<
Comply with the instructions on head restraint
height on page 45, and on damaged safety
belts on page 49.
Manual adjustment
Observe the adjustment instructions on
page 44 to ensure the best possible per-
sonal protection.<
Longitudinal direction
Pull lever 1 and slide the seat to the desired
position.
After releasing the lever, move the seat gently
forward or back to make sure it engages prop-
erly.
Height
Pull lever 2 and apply your weight to the seat or
lift it off, as necessary.
Backrest
Pull lever 3 and apply your weight to the back-
rest or lift it off, as necessary.
Tilt*
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat
or lift it off, as necessary.
Thigh support*
Pull the lever and move the thigh support for-
ward or back.
Electrical adjustment
Observe the adjustment instructions on
page 44 to ensure the best possible per-
sonal protection.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Controls
45
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
1 Longitudinal direction
2 Height
3 Angle
4 Backrest
The head restraints are adjusted manually, refer
to Head restraints below.
Lumbar support*
You can also adjust the contour of the backrest
to obtain additional support in the lumbar
region.
The upper hips and spinal column receive sup-
plementary support to help you maintain a
relaxed, upright sitting position.
> Increase or decrease curvature: press the
switch at the front or rear, respectively.
> Shift curvature up or down: press the switch
at the top or bottom, respectively.
Backrest width*
You can change the width of the backrest to suit
your individual preferences by adjusting the lat-
eral-support pads.
Press the front or rear end of the switch.
Backrest width decreases or increases accord-
ingly.
Head restraints
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of neck injury in the event of an accident.
Adjust the head restraint in such a way
that its center is at approx. ear level. Oth-
erwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the
event of an accident. Only remove a head
restraint if no one will be sitting on the seat in
question. Reinstall the head restraint before
transporting anyone on that seat. Otherwise,
the passenger will be without protection from
the head restraint.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Adjustments
46
Front seats
Height adjustment
> To raise: pull up.
> To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
slide the head restraint down.
Removing
1. Pull up as far as it will go.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head
restraint all the way out.
Rear seats
Height adjustment
> To raise: pull up.
> To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
slide the head restraint down.
The center head restraint is not height-adjust-
able.
Removing
Sedan:
Only with through-loading system:
1. Pull up as far as it will go.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, tilt the rear seat
backrest slightly forward and pull the head
restraint all the way out.
Only remove the head restraints if no pas-
sengers will be sitting in the rear. Reinstall
head restraints before transporting passengers
in the rear.<
Folding head restraints down and back
up
Folding down:
Press the button, arrow 1.
Folding up:
Pull the head restraint.
Sedan:
Depending on the equipment version, it may be
possible to fold down the outer rear head
restraints as well.
Only fold the head restraints down if no
passengers will be sitting in the rear. Fold
up the head restraints before transporting pas-
sengers in the rear.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Controls
47
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Heated seats*
Press once for each temperature level.
Three LEDs indicate the highest temperature.
To switch off:
Press button longer.
If you continue driving within approx. the next
15 minutes, the seat heating is automatically
activated at the previously set temperature.
The temperature is lowered or the heating is
switched off entirely to save on battery power.
The LEDs stay lit.
Seat and mirror memory*
You can store and call up two different combi-
nations of driver's-seat and exterior-mirror
positions.
Settings for the backrest width and lumbar sup-
port are not stored in memory.
Storing
1. Switch on radio readiness or the ignition,
refer to page 56.
2. Adjust the seat and exterior mirrors to the
desired positions.
3. Press the button.
The LED in the button lights up.
4. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2: the
LED goes out.
The driver's seat and exterior mirror posi-
tions are stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Call-up
Do not call up memory while you are driv-
ing, otherwise unexpected seat move-
ment could result in an accident.<
Convenience mode
1. Unlock and open the driver's door or switch
on radio readiness, refer to page 56.
2. Briefly press the desired memory button 1
or 2.
The adjusting procedure is halted immediately
when you touch a seat adjustment switch or
one of the memory buttons.
Safety feature
1. Close the driver's door and switch the igni-
tion on or off, refer to page 56.
2. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2
and keep it pressed until the adjustment
process has been completed.
If the button was pressed accidentally:
Press the button again; the LED goes out.
Call-up with the remote control
The driver's seat position last stored is stored
for the remote control currently in use.
You can select the occasion on which the seat is
reset to that position.
> Call-up when the vehicle is unlocked.
> Call-up when the driver's door is opened.
When this Personal Profile function is
used, first make sure that the footwell
behind the driver's seat is free of obstacles.
Failure to do so could cause injury to persons or
damage to objects as a result of a rearward
movement of the seat.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Adjustments
48
The adjusting procedure is halted immediately
when you touch a seat adjustment switch or
one of the memory buttons.
Selecting automatic call-up
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Door locks" is selected and press the
controller.
6. Select "Central locking" and press the con-
troller.
7. Select "Last seat pos." and press the con-
troller.
8. Select "After unlocking" or "After door
opened".
9. Press the controller.
Switching off automatic call-up
Select "Deactivated" and press the controller.
Safety belts
Observe the adjustment instructions on
page 44 to ensure the best possible per-
sonal protection.<
Before every drive, make sure that all occupants
wear their safety belts. Airbags complement the
safety belt as an additional safety device, but
they do not represent a substitute.
On the rear seats, the center belt buckle marked
with the letters CENTER is solely intended for
the center passenger.
Closing
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in
the belt buckle.
The upper belt anchor is suitable for adults of
any stature as long as the seat is adjusted prop-
erly, refer to page 44.
Opening
1. Grasp the belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the buckle.
3. Guide the belt into its reel.
'Fasten safety belts' reminder for front
seats
The indicator lamp comes on and an
acoustic signal sounds. In addition, a
message appears on the Control Dis-
play. Check whether the safety belt
has been fastened correctly.
The 'Fasten safety belts' reminder is issued as
long as the driver's safety belt has not been fas-
tened. The 'Fasten safety belts' reminder is also
activated at road speeds above approx. 5 mph
or 8 km/h if the front passenger's safety belt is
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Controls
49
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
not fastened, if objects are placed on the front
passenger seat, or if driver or front passenger
unfasten their safety belts.
Damage to safety belts
If the safety belts are damaged or
stressed in an accident: have the belt sys-
tem, including any belt tensioners or child-
restraint systems, replaced and the belt
anchors checked. Have this work done only by
your BMW center or at a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
respondingly trained personnel. Otherwise, it is
not guaranteed that the safety devices will func-
tion properly.<
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
The front passenger's mirror is more con-
vex than the driver's mirror. The objects
seen in the mirror are closer than they appear.
Do not gauge your distance from traffic behind
you on the basis of what you see in the mirror;
otherwise there is an increased risk of an acci-
dent.<
1 Adjustments
2 Switching to the other mirror or automatic
curb monitor
*
3 Folding mirrors in and out
*
The setting for the exterior mirrors is stored* for
the remote control currently in use
*
. The stored
position is called up automatically when the
vehicle is unlocked.
Manual adjustment
The mirrors can also be adjusted manually:
press the edge of the glass.
Folding mirrors in and out*
At driving speeds up to approx. 12 mph/
20 km/h, you can fold the mirrors in and out by
pressing button 3. This can be beneficial in nar-
row streets, for example, or for moving mirrors
that were folded in by hand back out into their
correct positions. Mirrors that were folded in are
folded out automatically at a speed of approx.
25 mph/40 km/h.
Before entering an automatic car wash,
fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or with
button 3, to prevent them from being damaged
due to the width of the vehicle.<
Automatic heating*
Both exterior mirrors are heated automatically
while the engine is running or the ignition is
switched on.
Passenger-side mirror tilt function –
automatic curb monitor*
Activating
1. Push the switch to the position for the
driver's-side mirror, arrow 1.
2. Engage reverse gear or move the selector
lever to position R.
The glass of the mirror on the passenger
side tilts slightly down. This allows the
driver to see the area immediately adjacent
to the vehicle, e.g. a curb, when backing into
a parking space.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Adjustments
50
Deactivating
Push the switch to the position for the passen-
ger-side mirror, arrow 2.
Interior rearview mirror
Turn the knob to reduce glare from the head-
lamps of cars behind you when driving at night.
Interior and exterior mirrors, automatic
dimming feature*
The automatic dimming feature of the interior
and exterior mirrors
*
is controlled by two photo
cells in the interior rearview mirror. One photo
cell is in the mirror frame, see arrow; the other is
on the back of the mirror.
In order to ensure that the system functions
correctly, keep the photo cells clean, do not
cover the area between the interior rearview
mirror and windshield, and do not affix adhesive
labels or stickers of any kind to the windshield
directly in front of the mirror.
Steering wheel
Adjustments
Do not adjust the steering wheel position
while the car is in motion, otherwise there
is a risk of accident due to an unexpected move-
ment.<
1. Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seated posi-
tion.
3. Swing the lever back up.
Do not use force to swing the lever
back up, otherwise the mechanism
will be damaged.<
Programmable buttons on the steering
wheel
You can program the buttons to suit your per-
sonal preferences:
These settings are stored for the remote con-
trol currently in use.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Controls
51
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Steering wheel buttons" and press
the controller.
A list showing various functions is dis-
played:
> "Navigation voice instructions"
Voice messages from the navigation
system
*
> "Air recirculation on / off"
Permanent shut-off of outside air, refer
to AUC Automatic recirculated-air con-
trol on page 102
> "Mute on / off"
To mute the audio sources
> "Monitor on / off"
To switch the Control Display on/off
> "Telephone list"
*
To show/hide the phone book or last dis-
played list of stored phone numbers
> "Next entertainment source"
To change the audio source
5. Select the desired function and press the
controller.
6. Select a button, if appropriate, and press
the controller.
You can operate the selected function using the
corresponding button.
Operating a function
Briefly press the appropriate button on the
steering wheel.
If you have programmed "Navigation voice
instructions" for one of the buttons:
> Switch voice instructions on/off:
Press the button for a longer period.
> To repeat the last voice instruction:
Press the button briefly.
> To cancel a voice instruction during an
announcement:
Press the button briefly.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Transporting children safely
52
Transporting children safely
The right place for children
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, otherwise they could endanger
themselves and/or other persons by opening
the doors, for example.<
The rear center seat is not suitable for installing
child-restraint systems for all age groups,
approved for the age group in question.
Children always in the rear
Accident research has shown that the safest
place for children is on the rear seat.
Children under the age of 13 or smaller
than 5 ft/150 cm may be transported only
in the rear in suitable child-restraint systems
appropriate for their age, weight and size. Oth-
erwise there is an increased risk of injury in the
event of an accident.<
Children 13 years of age or older must be buck-
led in with a safety belt as soon as there no
longer is any child-restraint system that is
appropriate for their age, size and weight.
Exception for front passenger seat
Should it be necessary to use a child-
restraint system on the front passenger
seat, the front and side airbags for the front pas-
senger must be deactivated. Otherwise, a child
traveling on that seat will face a significant risk
of injury if the airbags are triggered off, even
with a child-restraint system.<
For more information on automatic deactivation
of the front passenger airbags refer to page 94.
Installing child-restraint
systems
Observe the child-restraint system man-
ufacturer's instructions when selecting,
installing and using child-restraint systems.
Otherwise the protective effect may be dimin-
ished.<
Standard child-restraint systems are designed
to be secured with a lap belt or with the lap-belt
section of a lap-and-shoulder belt. Incorrectly
or improperly installed child-restraint systems
can increase the risk of injury to children.
Always follow the installation instructions for
the system with the greatest care.
On the front passenger seat
After installing a child-restraint system on
the front passenger seat, make sure that
the front and side airbags for the front passen-
ger are deactivated, otherwise there is an
increased risk of injury if the airbags deploy.<
Backrest width*
The backrest width of the front passen-
ger's seat must be at its widest possible
setting. Do not change the setting after install-
ing the child seat. Otherwise the child seat's
stability on the front passenger's seat is lim-
ited.<
1. Adjust the backrest width to its widest set-
ting, refer to page 45.
2. Install the child seat.
Child seat security
The rear safety belts and the front passenger's
safety belt can be prevented from being pulled
out in order to fasten child-restraint systems.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Controls
53
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
To lock the safety belt
1. Secure the child-restraint system with the
belt.
2. Pull the belt strap all the way out.
3. Allow the belt strap to retract and pull it taut
against the child-restraint system.
The safety belt is locked.
To unlock the safety belt
1. Open the belt buckle
2. Remove the child-restraint system.
3. Allow the safety belt strap to retract all the
way.
LATCH child-restraint fixing
system
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHil-
dren.
To install and use the LATCH child
restraint system, follow the operating and
safety instructions provided by the manufac-
turer of the system, otherwise the protective
function of the seat may be compromised.<
Before installing the child seat, pull the belt out
of the area for the child-restraint fixing system.
Ensure that both lower LATCH anchors
are correctly engaged and that the child
restraint system is resting firmly against the
backrest, otherwise the protective function of
the seat may be compromised.<
Rear seats with through-loading
system
The anchor points for the lower LATCH
anchors are located behind the labeled protec-
tive caps.
Rear seats without through-loading
system
The anchor points for the lower LATCH
anchors are located at the positions indicated
by arrows, in the gap between the seat and the
backrest.
Child-restraint system with tether
strap
Use the top tether anchors to secure
child-restraint systems only, otherwise
the anchors could be damaged.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Transporting children safely
54
Sedan
There are three additional anchors for child-
restraint systems with tether straps, see
arrows.
Sports Wagon
There are three additional anchors under a
cover for child-restraint systems with tether
straps, see arrows.
Placement of the tether strap
Make sure the upper retaining strap does
not run over sharp edges and is not
twisted as it passes to the top anchor. Other-
wise the strap will not properly secure the child-
restraint system in the event of an accident.<
Sedan
Sports Wagon
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Anchor
5 Rear window shelf/cargo bay floor
6 Seat backrest
7 Upper retaining strap of child-restraint sys-
tem
Fold the anchors and, if necessary, the head
restraints
*
upward before use.
1. Push the head restraint upward.
2. Guide the upper retaining strap between
the head restraint holders.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Controls
55
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
3. Use the hook to clip the retaining strap to
the anchor.
4. Push the head restraint into its lowermost
position.
5. Pull the retaining strap taut.
On journeys
Child-safety locks for rear doors
Slide down the safety lever on the rear door:
The door can now be opened from the outside
only.
Safety switch for power windows
Press the safety switch for the power windows,
refer to page 39, if children are traveling on the
rear seat.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Driving
56
Driving
Ignition lock
Insert the remote control into the
ignition lock
Insert the remote control all the way into the
ignition lock.
> Radio readiness is switched on.
Individual electrical consumers can operate.
Convenient access*
If the car is equipped with convenient access,
only insert the remote control into the ignition
lock under special circumstances, refer to
page 36.
Removing the remote control from the
ignition lock
Do not forcibly pull the remote control out
of the ignition lock as this may cause
damage.<
Before removing the remote control, push it all
the way in to release the locking mechanism.
> The ignition is switched off if it was on.
Automatic transmission
You cannot take out the remote control unless
the selector lever is in the P position: interlock.
Start/stop button
Pressing the start/stop button switches radio
readiness or the ignition on or off.
The engine is started when you press the
start/stop button and depress the clutch if
the car has manual transmission, or the brake if
the car has automatic transmission.<
Radio readiness
Individual electrical consumers can operate.
The time and the outside temperature are dis-
played in the instrument cluster.
Radio readiness is switched off automatically:
> When the remote control is removed from
the ignition lock
> In cars with convenient access
*
, by touch-
ing the surface above the door lock, refer to
Locking on page 37
Ignition on
All electrical consumers can operate. The
odometer and trip odometer are displayed in
the instrument cluster.
When the engine is off, please switch off
the ignition and any unnecessary electri-
cal consumers in order to preserve the bat-
tery.<
Radio readiness and ignition off
All indicator and warning lamps as well as dis-
plays in the instrument cluster go out.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Controls
57
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Starting the engine
Do not run the engine in closed rooms,
otherwise the inhalation of toxic exhaust
gases can cause unconsciousness and death.
The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide,
an odorless and colorless, but highly toxic gas.
Never leave an unattended vehicle with the
engine running, otherwise such a vehicle repre-
sents a potential safety hazard.
Before leaving the car with the engine running,
place the transmission in idle or move the
selector lever to position P and forcefully apply
the parking brake to prevent the car from mov-
ing.<
Avoid frequent starting in quick succes-
sion as well as repeated start attempts in
which the engine does not start. Otherwise, the
fuel is not burned or incompletely burned and
there is a danger of overheating and damaging
the catalytic converter.<
Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the
vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right
away, but at moderate engine speeds.
Manual transmission
Remote control in the ignition lock or, with con-
venient access, inside the vehicle, refer to
page 36.
1. Depress the brake.
2. Depress the clutch and shift to idle position.
3. Press the start/stop button.
The starter operates automatically for a certain
time, and stops automatically as soon as the
engine has started.
Automatic transmission
Remote control in the ignition lock or, with con-
venient access, inside the vehicle, refer to
page 36.
1. Depress the brake.
2. Move the selector lever to position P.
3. Press the start/stop button.
The starter operates automatically for a certain
time, and stops automatically as soon as the
engine has started.
Switching off the engine
Always take the remote control with you
when you leave the vehicle.
When parking, apply the parking brake force-
fully, otherwise the vehicle could begin to roll.<
Manual transmission
1. With the car at a standstill, press the start/
stop button.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Forcefully apply the parking brake.
4. Removing the remote control from the igni-
tion lock, refer to page 56.
Automatic transmission
1. With the car at a standstill, move the selec-
tor lever to position P.
2. Press the start/stop button.
3. Forcefully apply the parking brake.
4. Removing the remote control from the igni-
tion lock, refer to page 56.
Parking brake
The parking brake is primarily intended to pre-
vent the vehicle from rolling while parked; it
brakes the rear wheels.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Driving
58
Indicator lamp
The indicator lamp is lit, and when you
drive off an acoustic signal sounds in
addition. The parking brake is still
applied.
Indicator lamp for Canadian models.
Applying
The lever locks in position automatically.
Releasing
Pull slightly upwards, press the button and
lower the lever.
In exceptional cases, if the parking brake
has to be used to slow or stop the car, do
not pull the lever up too hard. In doing so, con-
tinuously press the button of the parking brake
lever.
Otherwise, excessive force on the parking
brake can lock up the rear wheels and cause the
rear of the car to swerve.<
To prevent corrosion and one-sided brak-
ing action, occasionally apply the parking
brake lightly when the vehicle is slowly coming
to a stop if the traffic conditions are suitable.
The brake lamps do not light up when the park-
ing brake is applied.<
Manual transmission
When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, press
the gearshift lever to the right. Otherwise
the engine could be damaged if you inadvert-
ently shift into 3rd or 4th gear.<
Reverse gear
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.
When the gearshift lever is pressed to the left, a
slight resistance has to be overcome.
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic*
In addition to fully automatic operation, you can
also manually shift with the Steptronic, refer to
page 59.
Vehicle parking
To prevent the vehicle from rolling,
always select position P and apply the
parking brake before leaving the vehicle with
the engine running.<
Disengaging the remote control
In order to remove the remote control from the
ignition lock, you must first move the selector
lever to position P and switch off the engine:
interlock. Removing the remote control from
the ignition lock, refer to page 56.
Selector lever positions
P R N D M/S + –
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Controls
59
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Displays in the instrument cluster
P R N D DS M1 to M6
The selector lever position is displayed, or the
current gear in the manual mode.
Changing selector lever positions
> With the ignition switched on or the engine
running, the selector lever can be moved
out of position P: interlock.
> Before moving the lever away from P or N
with the vehicle stationary, first depress the
brake; otherwise the selector lever will
refuse to move: shiftlock.
To prevent the vehicle from creeping
after you select a driving position,
depress the brake until you are ready to
start.<
A lock prevents you from inadvertently engag-
ing selector lever positions R and P. To cancel
the lock, press the button on the front of the
selector lever, see arrow.
P Park
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.
The rear wheels are locked.
R Reverse
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.
N Neutral, idle
You can select this in a car wash, for example.
The vehicle can roll.
D Drive, automatic position
Position for normal vehicle operation. All for-
ward gears are selected automatically.
Under normal operating conditions, fuel con-
sumption is lowest when you are driving in posi-
tion D.
Kick-down
Kick-down enables you to achieve maximum
performance.
Press the accelerator pedal beyond the full-
throttle resistance point.
Sport program and manual operation
M/S
Move selector lever from position D toward the
left into the M/S shifting slot:
The sport program is activated and DS is dis-
played on the instrument cluster. This position
is recommended for a performance-oriented
driving style.
To use the automatic mode again, move the
selector lever to the right into position D.
Shifting gears via the selector lever
When you press the selector lever forwards or
backwards, the manual mode is activated and
Steptronic changes gear. M1 through M6 are
displayed on the instrument cluster.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Driving
60
Upshifts and downshifts are executed only
when they will result in a plausible combination
of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example,
a downshift that would cause the engine to
overrev will not be executed by the system. The
gear selected is briefly displayed in the instru-
ment cluster, followed by the gear actually in
use.
Shifting gears via shift paddles* on the
steering wheel
The shift paddles allow you to shift gears
quickly since both hands can remain on the
steering wheel.
> When you use the shift paddles on the
steering wheel to shift gears in automatic
mode, the transmission switches to manual
mode.
> If you do not accelerate or shift gears using
the shift paddles for a certain amount of
time, the transmission switches back to
automatic mode.
If the selector lever is in the M/S gear
plane, manual mode remains active.<
> To shift up: pull one of the shift paddles.
> To shift down: press one of the shift pad-
dles.
Upshifts and downshifts are executed only
when they will result in a plausible combination
of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example,
a downshift that would cause the engine to
overrev will not be executed by the system. The
gear selected is briefly displayed in the instru-
ment cluster, followed by the gear actually in
use.
Overriding selector lever lock
Should the selector lever refuse to move out of
position P although the button on the selector
lever is pressed, the selector lever lock can be
overridden:
1. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever.
2. Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever
until the sleeve is inside out.
3. Using the screwdriver from the onboard
tool kit, refer to page 228, press the red
lever while moving the selector lever to the
desired position.
Turn signals/
headlamp flasher
1 High beams
2 Headlamp flasher
3 Turn signals
Using turn signals
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
To turn off manually, press the lever to the
resistance point.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Controls
61
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
lamp indicates that a turn signal indicator
has failed.<
Indicating a turn briefly
Press the lever as far as the resistance point for
as long as you wish to indicate a turn.
Triple turn signal activation
Press the lever as far as the resistance point.
The turn signals flash three times.
You can activate or deactivate this function.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Lighting" is selected and press the
controller.
6. Select "Triple turn signal" and press the
controller.
Triple turn signaling is activated.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Wiper system
1 Switching on wipers
2 Switching off wipers or brief wipe
3 Activating/deactivating intermittent wipe or
rain sensor
*
4 Cleaning windshield and headlamps
*
5 Setting speed for intermittent wipe, or sen-
sitivity of the rain sensor
Switching on wipers
Press the lever upward, arrow 1.
The lever automatically returns to its initial posi-
tion when released.
Normal wiper speed
Press once.
The system switches to operation in the inter-
mittent mode when the vehicle is stationary.
Fast wiper speed
Press twice or press beyond the resistance
point.
The system switches to normal speed when the
vehicle is stationary.
Intermittent wipe or rain sensor*
If the car is not equipped with a rain sensor, the
intermittent-wipe time is a preset.
If the car is equipped with a rain sensor, the time
between wipes is controlled automatically and
depends on the intensity of the rainfall. The rain
sensor is mounted on the windshield, directly in
front of the interior rearview mirror.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Driving
62
Activating intermittent wipe or rain
sensor
Press the button, arrow 3. The LED in the but-
ton lights up.
Setting speed for intermittent wipe or
sensitivity of the rain sensor
Turn knurled wheel 5 up or down.
Deactivating intermittent wipe or rain
sensor
Press the button again, arrow 3.
The LED goes out.
Deactivate the rain sensor before enter-
ing an automatic car wash. Failure to do
so could result in damage caused by undesired
wiper activation.<
Cleaning windshield and headlamps*
Pull the lever, arrow 4.
Washer fluid is sprayed onto the windshield and
the wipers are operated for a short time.
When the vehicle lighting system is switched
on, the headlamps are cleaned at regular and
appropriate intervals.
Do not use the washers if there is any
danger that the fluid will freeze on the
windshield. If you do, your vision could be
obscured. Antifreeze should therefore be
added to the fluid, refer to Washer fluid.
Do not use the washers when the washer fluid
reservoir is empty, otherwise you will damage
the washer pump.<
Windshield washer nozzles
The windshield washer nozzles are heated
automatically while the engine is running or the
ignition is switched on
*
.
Sports Wagon: rear window wiper
1 Intermittent operation. When reverse gear
is engaged, the system switches to contin-
uous operation.
2 Cleaning the rear window
The rear window wiper does not move if the
lever is in position 1 before the ignition is
switched on.
To switch on the rear window wiper:
1. Move the lever to its home position.
2. Reselect the desired position.
Do not use the washers when the washer
fluid reservoir is empty, otherwise you will
damage the washer pump.<
Washer fluid
Washer fluid antifreeze is flammable.
Therefore, keep it away from ignition
sources and only store it in the closed original
container that is kept out of reach of children,
otherwise there is a risk of personal injury.
Comply with the instructions on the con-
tainer.<
Washer fluid filler neck
Only refill washer fluid when the engine is
cool to avoid contact with hot engine
parts. Otherwise, fluid spills constitute a fire
hazard and a risk to personal safety.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Controls
63
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
All washer nozzles are supplied with washer
fluid by the same reservoir.
Fill with water and, if required, with a washer
antifreeze, according to manufacturer's recom-
mendations.
Mix the water and antifreeze before filling
the washer fluid reservoir to make sure
the correct concentration is maintained.<
Capacity
Approx. 6.3 US quarts/6 liters.
Cruise control*
The concept
Cruise control is available for use at speeds of
approx. 20 mph or 30 km/h. The car then stores
and maintains the speed that you specify using
the lever on the steering column. In order to
maintain the specified speed, the system
brakes the vehicle when the engine braking
effect is insufficient on downhill gradients.
Do not use cruise control when driving at
constant speed is prevented by adverse
conditions, e.g. winding roads, dense traffic or
poor road conditions due to, e.g., snow, rain, ice
or loose surfaces. Otherwise you could lose
control of the vehicle and cause an accident as a
result.<
Manual transmission
You can shift gears while cruise control is acti-
vated. An indicator lamp notifies you that you
should shift gears when you drive for an
extended period at very high or very low engine
speeds, or the system is deactivated.
One lever for all functions
1 Storing and maintaining speed or accelerat-
ing
2 Storing and maintaining speed or deceler-
ating
3 Deactivating cruise control
4 Resuming a speed stored beforehand
Maintaining current speed
Tap the lever, arrow 1, or pull it briefly, arrow 2.
The car's current speed is stored and main-
tained. It is displayed on the speedometer and
briefly in the instrument cluster.
On uphill gradients, it may prove impossible to
maintain the set speed if current engine power
output is insufficient. If the engine braking
effect is insufficient on downhill slopes, the sys-
tem will brake the vehicle slightly.
Increasing desired speed
Repeatedly press the lever to the resistance
point or beyond, arrow 1, until the desired
speed is reached.
> Each time the lever is pressed to the resis-
tance point, the desired speed is increased
by approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.
> Each time the lever is pressed beyond the
resistance point, the desired speed is
increased by up to 5 mph or 10 km/h.
The system stores and maintains the speed.
Accelerating using the lever
Accelerating slightly:
Press the lever to the resistance point, arrow 1,
until the desired speed is reached.
Accelerating significantly:
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Driving
64
Press the lever beyond the resistance point,
arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached.
The vehicle accelerates without pressure on
the accelerator pedal. The system stores and
maintains the speed.
Decreasing speed
Repeatedly pull the lever to the resistance point
or beyond, arrow 2, until the desired speed is
displayed.
> Each time the lever is pulled to the resis-
tance point, the desired speed is decreased
by approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.
> Each time the lever is pulled beyond the
resistance point, the desired speed is
reduced by up to 5 mph or 10 km/h until the
minimum speed of 20 mph or 30 km/h is
achieved.
The system stores and maintains the speed.
Deactivating cruise control
Tap the lever upwards or downwards, arrow 3.
The displays on the speedometer disappear.
In addition, the system is automatically deacti-
vated:
> When you brake the vehicle
> When you switch gears very slowly or shift
to idle in cars with manual transmission
> When you select the automatic transmis-
sion's neutral position N
> When you activate DTC or deactivate DSC
> When DSC or ABS is intervening
Cruise control is not deactivated by depressing
the accelerator pedal. Once the accelerator
pedal is released, the stored speed is achieved
again and maintained.
Warning lamp
The warning lamp comes on when
cruise control has been deactivated
by applying the parking brake or as a
result of DSC intervention. A message appears
on the Control Display.
Resuming a speed stored beforehand
Press the button, arrow 4. The last stored
speed is resumed and maintained.
In the following instances, the stored speed is
deleted and can no longer be resumed:
> When driving stability control systems are
intervening
> In cars with manual transmission: when you
shift gears very slowly or shift to idle posi-
tion
> In cars with automatic transmission: when
you engage selector lever position N
> When the ignition is switched off
Displays in the instrument cluster
1 Stored speed
2 Selected speed is displayed briefly
If --- mph or --- km/h temporarily appears
in the instrument cluster display, it is pos-
sible that the system prerequisites for operation
are currently not met.
Calling up Check Control messages, refer to
page 82.<
Malfunction
The warning lamp comes on when
the system has failed. A message
appears on the Control Display. You
can find more information starting on page 81.
Active cruise control*
The concept
With active cruise control, you can select a
desired speed which is not only automatically
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Controls
65
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
maintained when driving on open roadways, but
also varied to maintain a selected distance set-
ting as slower traffic is encountered.
Active cruise control is a technological advance
over the familiar cruise control and is a welcome
relief from the constant adjustment of speed
that can accompany driving in traffic on high-
ways or other high-speed thoroughfares. Espe-
cially on longer trips, the system can reduce
fatigue and tension, while increasing your
enjoyment of driving. Please use it safely and
responsibly.
Within the limits of its capability, the system
automatically adapts the car's speed to that of a
slower vehicle in front of you. You can specify
the distance to be maintained from the vehicle
in front in four stages. For safety reasons, the
distance is speed-dependent. Based on your
selected distance setting, the system automat-
ically decreases the throttle setting and lightly
applies the brakes if necessary. The vehicle
brake lamps will automatically illuminate to sig-
nal a following driver to take action. In addition,
it may be necessary for the vehicle or the driver
to downshift, depending on the kind of trans-
mission your vehicle is equipped with, to main-
tain the distance setting selected. If the vehicle
ahead speeds up or when the lane ahead
becomes clear, your vehicle will accelerate to
the speed you have selected by increasing the
throttle setting and shifting gears automatically
or by the driver as needed. Your selected speed
will be held when driving downhill, too.
Since this active cruise control system is a new
technology and operates differently from con-
ventional cruise control systems which you may
be accustomed to, you are strongly urged to
read all of the pages relating to this system
before use. Pay special attention to the System
limitations section beginning on page 68.
Braking sensation
> If you step on the brake pedal while the sys-
tem is braking, pedal sensation will be
slightly different from the usual.
> Possible noises during automatic braking
are normal.
Manual transmission
You can shift gears while cruise control is acti-
vated. An indicator lamp notifies you that you
should shift gears when you drive for an
extended period at very high or very low engine
speeds, or the system is deactivated.
Range of applications
The minimum desired speed is 20 mph or
30 km/h, the maximum desired speed is
110 mph or 180 km/h.
As with conventional cruise control sys-
tems, active cruise control in no way
diminishes or substitutes for the driver’s own
personal responsibility, alertness and aware-
ness in adjusting speed, braking or otherwise
controlling the vehicle. The driver should
decide when to use the system on the basis of
road, traffic, visibility, and weather conditions.
Active cruise control is intended for use on
highway-type roadways where traffic is moving
relatively smoothly. Do not use this system in
city driving; heavy traffic such as during rush
hour; on curvy, winding roads, slippery roads or
roads with sharp curves such as highway off-
ramps; during inclement weather such as snow,
strong rain or fog; or when entering inter-
changes, service/parking areas or toll booths.
It is also important to regulate your vehicle's
speed and distance setting within applicable
legal limits. Always be ready to take action or
apply the brakes if necessary, especially when
the system is actively following a vehicle in front
of you. Otherwise driving situations could result
that pose the risk of accidents.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Driving
66
One lever for all functions
1 Store and increase desired speed
2 Store and decrease desired speed
3 Deactivate system, refer to page 67
4 Resume stored desired speed and dis-
tance, refer to page 67
5 Select distance to vehicle driving ahead,
refer to page 66
Storing current speed
Briefly press the lever, arrow 1, or briefly pull it,
arrow 2, at a driving speed of more than approx.
20 mph or 30 km/h.
The car's current speed is stored. It is displayed
on the speedometer and briefly in the instru-
ment cluster.
Increasing desired speed
Press or tap the lever to the resistance point or
beyond, arrow 1, until the desired speed is dis-
played.
> Each time the lever is tapped to the resis-
tance point, the desired speed is increased
by approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.
> Each time the lever is tapped beyond the
resistance point, the desired speed is
increased by up to 5 mph or 10 km/h until
the maximum speed of 110 mph or
180 km/h is achieved.
The speed then displayed is stored and
achieved on a clear road.
Decreasing desired speed
Pull the lever, arrow 2, until the desired speed is
displayed.
The other functions work analogously to those
described under Increasing desired speed.
Selecting distance
> Press downward:
Increase distance
> Press upward:
Decrease distance.
The selected distance is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster.
Distance 1
Distance 2
Distance 3
This distance is always set when
the system is used for the first
time after starting the engine.
Distance 4
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Controls
67
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Use good judgment to select the appro-
priate following distance given road con-
ditions, traffic, applicable laws and driving rec-
ommendations for safe following distance.
Otherwise, an accident risk could result.<
Deactivating cruise control
Press the lever upward or downward, arrow 3.
The displays on the speedometer disappear.
In addition, the system is automatically deacti-
vated:
> When you brake the vehicle
> When the speed is reduced to below
20 mph or 30 km/h due to a traffic situation
> When you switch gears very slowly or shift
to idle in cars with manual transmission
> When you select the automatic transmis-
sion's neutral position N
> When you activate the Dynamic Traction
Control DTC
> When you deactivate the Dynamic Stability
Control DSC
> When DSC or ABS is intervening
> When the system does not recognize any
objects for a longer period of time, e.g. on
infrequently traveled roads without a shoul-
der or guard rails, or if the radar sensor is
covered with dirt, refer to page 68
> When you apply the parking brake
When the system is deactivated, you
must brake the vehicle yourself and/or
maneuver as necessary, otherwise there is a
risk of accident.<
Warning lamp
The warning lamp comes on when
active cruise control has been auto-
matically deactivated due to a driving
speed below 20 mph or 30 km/h, an application
of the parking brake or a DSC intervention. A
message appears on the Control Display.
Resuming stored desired speed and
distance
Briefly press the button, arrow 4.
The stored speed and distance are regained
and maintained.
In the following instances, the stored speed is
deleted and can no longer be resumed:
> When driving stability control systems are
intervening
> In cars with manual transmission: when you
shift gears very slowly or shift to idle posi-
tion
> In cars with automatic transmission: when
you engage selector lever position N
> When the ignition is switched off
Displays in the instrument cluster
1 Stored desired speed
2 Shows yellow: vehicle detected ahead
Flashes in red: system cannot maintain dis-
tance; driver must brake the vehicle
Flashes in yellow: driving stability control
systems are intervening; cruise control is
deactivated
3 Selected distance to vehicle ahead
The indicator lights up as soon as the sys-
tem is activated.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Driving
68
4 Selected desired speed is temporarily dis-
played
If --- mph or --- km/h temporarily appears
in the instrument cluster display, it is pos-
sible that the system prerequisites for operation
are currently not met. Calling up Check Control
messages, refer to page 82.<
Warning lamps
The indicator 2 flashes in red; a
signal sounds.
The system indicates that you
must brake and/or maneuver the
vehicle yourself. Active cruise con-
trol cannot automatically restore the distance to
the vehicle ahead.
This indicator does not release you from your
responsibility to adapt your desired speed and
driving style to prevailing driving conditions.
The indicator 2 flashes in yellow.
The prerequisites for operating
active cruise control are not met,
e.g. as a result of ABS or DSC
interventions. Active cruise control
is deactivated. You can reactivate the system, if
desired, by tapping or pulling the lever when
road and traffic conditions permit. It is not pos-
sible to resume a stored speed.
Radar sensor
The sensor's ability to detect vehicles ahead
may be restricted as a result of heavy rain, dirt,
snow or ice. If necessary, clean the radar sensor
located in the front bumper, see arrow. Be sure
to use particular care when removing any layers
of snow or ice from the sensor.
When the radar sensor is not properly posi-
tioned, active cruise control cannot be activated
at all.
Malfunction
The warning lamp comes on when
the system has failed. A message
appears on the Control Display. You
can find more information starting on page 81.
System limitations
Always remember that the range and abil-
ity of the system does have physical limi-
tations. It will not apply the brakes or decelerate
your vehicle when there is a slow-moving vehi-
cle, stopped vehicle or stationary object ahead
of you, as for example, at a traffic light or a
parked vehicle. Also, the system does not react
to oncoming traffic, pedestrians or other types
of potential traffic such as a rider on horseback.
It is also possible that the system may not
detect smaller moving objects such as motor-
cycles or bicycles. Be especially alert when
encountering any of these situations as the sys-
tem will neither automatically brake, nor provide
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Controls
69
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
a warning to you. Also, be aware that every
decrease in the distance setting allows your
vehicle to come closer to a vehicle in front of
you and requires a heightened amount of alert-
ness.<
Active cruise control is not and must not
be used as a collision avoidance/warning
system.<
If while your vehicle is actively following a vehi-
cle in front of you and the vehicle ahead speeds
up or the lane ahead becomes clear, then your
vehicle will accelerate to the speed you have
selected. Be aware that changing to a clear,
unobstructed lane will also result in your vehicle
accelerating.
Be certain to deactivate the system when
you pull into an exit lane for a highway off-
ramp.<
Also, vehicles traveling in a staggered manner
on a highway may cause a delay in the system's
reaction to a vehicle in front of you or may cause
the system to react to a vehicle actually in the
lane next to you. Always be ready to take action
or apply the brakes if necessary.
While active cruise control is capable of
braking your vehicle automatically when
you approach a slower vehicle ahead, it is
important to be aware that the ability of the sys-
tem to apply the brakes is also limited, e.g.
when you reduce your desired speed sharply.
The system cannot stop your vehicle. It uses
only a portion of braking system capacity and
does not utilize the full capacity of the vehicle
braking system. Therefore, the system cannot
decrease your speed for large differences in
speed between your vehicle and the vehicle
ahead. Examples: when you approach a vehicle
traveling at a much lower speed than your own
speed such as approaching a toll booth or when
a much slower vehicle cuts in front of you at
close range.<
Active cruise control can only decelerate the
vehicle to approx. 20 mph or 30 km/h.
Swerving vehicles
When a vehicle moves from an adjacent lane
into your lane, active cruise control will not rec-
ognize this vehicle until it is fully in your lane
ahead of your vehicle.
When a vehicle ahead suddenly swerves
into your lane, the system may not be able
to maintain the selected distance automatically.
This also applies to great differences in speed
between you and vehicles ahead, e.g. when
quickly approaching a truck. There is a risk of
collision. Once the system has established that
a vehicle is indeed in front of you, it will indicate
that you must brake and/or maneuver the vehi-
cle yourself. Take action yourself, otherwise
there is a risk of an accident.<
Behavior in curves
Because of the limited range of the system, it is
possible that in curves or on the peaks and val-
leys of hilly roads, a vehicle ahead may be rec-
ognized late, or not at all. Therefore, it is up to
the driver to select a speed that is prudent in
view of the curves and terrain of the roadway.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Driving
70
In approaching a curve, it is possible that active
cruise control would react briefly to a vehicle in
the adjacent lane. In addition, the system can
sense if your vehicle is in a curve and may not
accelerate. If your vehicle decelerates in either
case, you can choose to overcome the deceler-
ation by briefly pressing the accelerator pedal.
Your responsibility
Your actions have priority at all times. When you
press the accelerator pedal while driving with
active cruise control, the automatic braking
function will be temporarily interrupted. Once
you release the accelerator pedal, the desired
speed or the selected distance to the vehicle
ahead is achieved again.
Do not leave your foot on the accelerator
pedal and make sure that no objects such
as floor mats are lying on the accelerator pedal.
Otherwise the system may not be able to brake
the vehicle.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Controls
71
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Everything under control
Odometer, outside
temperature display, clock
1 Knob in the instrument cluster
2 Outside temperature display and clock
3 Odometer and trip odometer
Knob in the instrument cluster
> To reset the trip odometer while the ignition
is switched on
> To display the time, outside temperature
and odometer briefly while the ignition is
switched off
Units of measure
To select the respective units of measure, miles
or km for the odometer as well as 7 or 6 for
the outside temperature, refer to page 76.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Time, outside temperature display
Setting the time, refer to page 79.
Outside temperature warning
When the displayed temperature sinks to
approx. +377/+36, a signal sounds and a
warning lamp lights up. There is an increased
risk of black ice.
Black ice can also form at temperatures
above +377/+36. You should there-
fore drive carefully on bridges and shaded
roads, for example, otherwise there is an
increased risk of an accident.<
Odometer and trip odometer
Resetting trip odometer:
With the ignition switched on, press button 1 in
the instrument cluster.
When the vehicle is parked
If you still want to view the time, outside tem-
perature and odometer reading briefly after the
remote control has been taken out of the igni-
tion lock:
Press button 1 in the instrument cluster.
Tachometer
Never force the engine speed up into the red
warning field, see arrow. In this range, the fuel
supply is interrupted to protect the engine.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Everything under control
72
Coolant temperature
A warning lamp will come on if the coolant, and
therefore the engine, becomes too hot. In addi-
tion, a message will appear on the Control Dis-
play.
Check coolant level, refer to page 225.
Energy Control*
Displays the current fuel consumption. This
allows you to see whether your current driving
style is conducive to fuel economy with mini-
mum exhaust emissions.
Engine oil temperature*
When the engine is at normal operating temper-
ature, the engine oil temperature is between
approx. 2107/1006 and approx. 3007/
1506.
If the engine oil temperature is too high, a mes-
sage appears on the Control Display.
Fuel gauge
Fuel tank capacity: approx. 15.9 US gallons/
60 liters.
You can find information on refueling on
page 207.
If the tilt of the vehicle varies for a longer period,
when you are driving in mountainous areas, for
example, the indicator may fluctuate slightly.
Reserve
Once the fuel level has fallen to the reserve
zone, a message briefly appears on the Control
Display and the cruising range for the remaining
amount of fuel is displayed on the computer.
Under a cruising range of approx. 30 miles/
50 km, the message remains in the Control Dis-
play.
Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km, otherwise engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Controls
73
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Computer
Displays in the instrument cluster
Calling up information
Press the button in the turn indicator lever.
The following items of information are dis-
played in the order listed:
> Cruising range
> Average speed
> Average fuel consumption
> Current fuel consumption
*
> No information
To set the corresponding units of measure,
refer to Units of measure on page 76.
Cruising range
Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel. The range is calculated
on the basis of the way the car has been driven
over the last 18 miles/30 km and the amount of
fuel currently in the tank.
Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km, otherwise engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<
Average speed
Periods with the vehicle parked and the engine
switched off are not included in the calculations
of average speed.
With the trip computer, refer to page 74, you
can have the average speed for another trip dis-
played.
To reset average speed: press the button in the
turn indicator lever for approx. 2 seconds.
Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the time during which the engine is running.
With the trip computer, refer to page 74, you
can have the average consumption for another
trip displayed.
To reset average fuel consumption: press the
button in the turn indicator lever for approx.
2seconds.
Current fuel consumption*
Displays the current fuel consumption. This
allows you to see whether your current driving
style is conducive to fuel economy with mini-
mum exhaust emissions.
Displays on the Control Display
You can also call up the computer via iDrive; for
operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the right to call up
"Navigation".
3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Car Data" is selected and press the
controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Everything under control
74
4. Select "Onboard info" and press the con-
troller.
> Estimated time of arrival at destination:
> Manually enter a distance in the com-
puter, refer to information further below
> Enter a destination in the navigation sys-
tem, refer to page 130
> Cruising range
> Distance to destination:
> Manually enter a distance in the com-
puter, refer to information further below
> Enter a destination in the navigation sys-
tem, refer to page 130
> Average speed
> Average fuel consumption
Resetting values
You can reset the values for average speed and
average consumption:
1. Select the respective menu item and press
the controller.
2. Press the controller again to confirm your
selection.
Entering a distance manually
1. Select "Distance to dest." and press the
controller.
2. Turn the controller to select the distance to
your destination.
3. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The distance is automatically entered during
destination guidance.
Trip computer
The trip computer is suitable e.g. for a holiday
trip.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Call up "Navigation".
3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.
4. Select "Trip computer" and press the con-
troller.
> Departure time
> Driving time
> Distance traveled
> Average speed
> Average fuel consumption
Switching trip computer on/off and resetting all
values to zero:
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Controls
75
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
1. Select "Set" and press the controller.
2. Select the desired menu item and press the
controller.
Display options
You can display the computer or the trip com-
puter in the assistance window.
1. Move the controller to the right to change to
the assistance window and press the con-
troller.
2. Select a menu item:
> "Onboard info"
> "Trip computer"
3. Press the controller.
Settings and information
Operating principle
1 Button for:
> Selecting display
> Setting values
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Everything under control
76
2 Button for:
> Confirming selected display or set val-
ues
> Calling up computer information 73
3 When the lights are on: instrument lighting
brightness 99
4 Calling up Check Control 81
5 Checking engine oil level 222
6 Setting the time 79
7 Setting the date 80
8 Viewing service requirement display 76
Exiting displays
The outside-temperature reading and the time
reappear when you press button 2 or if you
make no entries within approx. 15 seconds. If
required, complete the current setting first.
Units of measure
You can set units of measure.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Language / Units" and press the
controller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Units" is selected and press the con-
troller.
6. Select the desired menu item and press the
controller.
7. Select the desired measurement unit and
press the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Service requirements
The remaining driving distance and the date of
the next scheduled service are displayed briefly
immediately after you start the engine or switch
on the ignition.
The extent of service work required can
be read out from the remote control by
your BMW Service Advisor.<
For certain maintenance operations, you can
view the respective distance remaining or due
date individually in the instrument cluster.
1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 56.
2. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up
or down repeatedly until the appropriate
symbol appears in the display, accompa-
nied by the words "SERVICE-INFO".
3. Press button 2.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Controls
77
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
4. Use button 1 to scroll through the individual
service items.
Possible displays
1 Button for selecting functions
2 Service requirements
3 Engine oil
4 Roadworthiness test
*
5 Front brake pads
6 Rear brake pads
7 Brake fluid
The sequence of displayed service items may
vary. The data for the next service appointment
is shown first.
Supplementary information
You can have further information on the scope
of maintenance displayed on the Control Dis-
play, refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Info sources" and press the control-
ler.
4. Select "Service Info" and press the control-
ler.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Service requirements" is selected and
press the controller.
6. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the second field from the top. Turn the con-
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Everything under control
78
troller until "Status" is selected and press
the controller.
A list of selected maintenance operations and, if
applicable, inspections required by law is dis-
played.
You can request more detailed information on
every entry:
Select the entry and press the controller.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Symbols
No service is currently required.
The deadline for service or a legally man-
dated inspection is approaching. Please
schedule a service appointment.
The service deadline has already passed.
Entering deadlines for legally required
inspections*
Make sure the date on the Control Display is
always set correctly, refer to page 80, otherwise
the effectiveness of CBS Condition Based Ser-
vice is not ensured.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Info sources" and press the control-
ler.
4. Select "Service Info" and press the control-
ler.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Service requirements" is selected and
press the controller.
6. Select "Status" and press the controller.
7. Select "State inspection" and press the
controller.
8. Select "Set service date" and press the
controller. The month is highlighted.
9. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
10. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The year is highlighted.
11. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
12. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The date entry is stored.
To exit from the menu:
Select and press the controller.
More information on the BMW Maintenance
System can be found on page 226.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Controls
79
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Clock
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on
page 28.
Setting the time
In the instrument cluster
To set the 12h/24h mode, refer to Setting the
12h/24h format below.
1. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up
or down repeatedly until the appropriate
symbol appears in the display, accompa-
nied by the time and the word "SET".
2. Press button 2.
3. Use button 1 to set the hours.
4. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
5. Use button 1 to set the minutes.
6. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
7. Press button 2.
The system accepts the new time.
Via iDrive
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button once or twice until
the start menu appears.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "Time / Date" is
selected and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Everything under control
80
5. If necessary, move the controller forwards
to move the highlight marker to the upper-
most field.
6. Turn the controller until "Time" is selected
and press the controller.
7. Turn the controller until "Set time" is
selected and press the controller.
Adjusting settings
8. Turn the controller to set the hours and
press the controller.
9. Turn the controller to set the minutes and
press the controller.
The system accepts the new time.
Switching on the hour signal*
You will hear three tones just before each full
hour.
Select "Hour memo" and press the controller.
The hour signal is activated.
Setting the 12h/24h format
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "Time / Date" is
selected and press the controller.
5. Select "Time format" and press the control-
ler.
6. Select the desired format and press the
controller.
Date
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on
page 28.
Setting the date
In the instrument cluster
To set the dd/mm or mm/dd date format, refer
to Setting the date format below.
1. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up
or down repeatedly until the appropriate
symbol appears in the display, accompa-
nied by the date and the word "SET".
2. Press button 2.
3. Use button 1 to set the day of the month.
4. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
5. Set the month and the year in the same way.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Controls
81
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
6. Press button 2.
The system stores the new date.
Via iDrive
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Select "Date" and press the controller.
5. Select "Set date" and press the controller.
The first date display setting is selected.
6. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
7. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The next setting is highlighted.
8. Make the remaining adjustments. After the
last adjustment, the date is stored.
Setting the date format
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "Time / Date" is
selected and press the controller.
5. Select "Date format" and press the control-
ler.
6. Select the desired format and press the
controller.
Check Control
The concept
The Check Control monitors vehicle functions
and alerts you to any malfunctions in the sys-
tems monitored. Such a Check Control mes-
sage includes indicator and warning lamps in
the instrument cluster and, in some circum-
stances, an acoustic signal as well as text mes-
sages at the bottom of the Control Display.
Indicator and warning lamps
Indicator and warning lamps can light up in a
variety of combinations and colors.
indicates that Check Control messages have
been stored. You can view the Check Control
messages whenever it is convenient for you.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Everything under control
82
Explanatory text messages
Text messages at the lower edge of the Control
Display explain the meaning of the displayed
indicator and warning lamps.
For most Check Control messages, you can
view more information later, e.g. regarding the
cause of a malfunction and how to respond,
refer to page 82.
In urgent cases, this information will be shown
as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.
To exit the displayed information:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Hiding Check Control messages
Press the button in the turn indicator lever.
Some Check Control messages are displayed
until the malfunctions have been rectified. They
cannot be hidden. If several malfunctions occur
at the same time, they are displayed in succes-
sion.
They are marked with the symbol shown
here.
Other messages are automatically hidden after
approx. 20 seconds, but are kept in memory.
They are marked with the symbol shown
here.
Viewing stored Check Control
messages
1. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up
or down repeatedly until the appropriate
symbol appears in the display, accompa-
nied by the words "CHECK CONTROL".
2. Press button 2.
"CHECK OK" appears if there are no Check
Control messages.
If a Check Control message has been
stored, the corresponding lamp comes on.
It is accompanied by a text message on the
Control Display.
3. Push button 1 to check for other messages.
4. Press button 2.
The display again shows the outside tem-
perature and the time.
Viewing more information later
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Controls
83
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
3. Select "Info sources" and press the control-
ler.
4. Select "Service Info" and press the control-
ler.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Check Control messages" is selected
and press the controller.
6. Select a text message and press the con-
troller.
To exit the display:
Select and press the controller.
Speed limit
You can enter a speed, and a Check Control
message will indicate when you reach this
speed. This enables you, for example, to
receive warnings if you exceed a speed limit in
an urban area.
You are only warned of reaching this speed a
second time if your vehicle speed falls below it
again by at least 3 mph or 5 km/h.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Call up "Navigation".
3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.
4. Select "Limit" and press the controller.
Setting or changing the limit
1. Select speed value and press the controller.
2. Turn the controller to set the limit.
3. Press the controller to apply the setting.
Applying your current speed as limit
Select "Select current speed" and press the
controller. The system adopts your current
speed as the limit.
Activating the limit
Select "On" and press the controller.
Limit is activated.
Stopwatch
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Call up "Navigation".
3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Everything under control
84
4. Select "Stopwatch" and press the control-
ler.
Starting, stopping or resetting
> Select "Start" and press the controller.
The stopwatch starts at the displayed time.
> Select "Reset" and press the controller.
The stopwatch is reset and restarts if it was
running beforehand.
> Select "Stop" and press the controller.
This stops the timer.
Taking an interim time reading
Select "Interim time" and press the controller.
The interim time appears below the ongoing
primary stopwatch count.
All of the remaining functions remain
available at all times while the stopwatch
is running. The stopwatch continues operation
in the background.<
Altering settings
Language on the Control Display
The language of the Control Display can be set.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Language" is selected and press the
controller.
5. Select "Text language" and press the con-
troller. You can switch to another language
for the display texts and navigation mes-
sages.
6. Select and activate the desired language by
pressing the controller.
Brightness of the Control Display
The brightness is automatically adapted to the
ambient lighting conditions. Note, however,
that you can change the basic setting while the
low beams are switched on. The setting is
stored for the remote control currently in use.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Brightness" is selected and press the
controller.
5. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Controls
85
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Technology for driving comfort and safety
PDC Park Distance Control*
The concept
The PDC assists you with maneuvering in tight
parking spaces. Acoustic signals and a visual
indicator
warn you of the presence of an object
behind your vehicle. To measure the distance,
there are four ultrasonic sensors in either
bumper.
These sensors have a range of approx. 6.5 ft/
2 m. However, an acoustic warning does not
sound until an object is approx. 24 in/60 cm
from the corner sensors, or approx. 5 ft/1.50 m
from the center sensors.
PDC is a parking aid that can indicate
objects when they are approached
slowly, as is usually the case when parking.
Avoid approaching an object at high speed, oth-
erwise physical circumstances may lead to the
system warning being issued too late.<
Switching on automatically
With the engine running or the ignition switched
on, the system is activated after approx. 1 sec-
ond when you engage reverse gear or move the
automatic transmission selector lever to
position R. Wait this short period before driving.
Switching off automatically
After approx. 165 ft/50 m of driving or above
approx. 20 mph/approx. 30 km/h, the system
switches off and the LED goes out.
Signal tones
When nearing an object, its position is indicated
correspondingly by an interval tone. As the dis-
tance between vehicle and object decreases,
the intervals between the tones become
shorter. If the distance to the nearest object
falls to below roughly 1 ft/30 cm, then a contin-
uous tone sounds.
An interval tone is interrupted after approx.
3seconds
> if you remain in front of an object that has
been detected by only one of the corner
sensors
> if you are driving parallel to a wall.
Malfunction
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster comes on. PDC is malfunc-
tioning. A message appears on the
Control Display. Have the system checked.
To avoid this problem, keep the sensors clean
and free of ice or snow in order to ensure that
they will continue to operate effectively. When
using a high-pressure cleaner, do not spray the
sensors for extended periods of time and only
from a distance of at least 4 in/10 cm.
PDC with visual warning
You can also have the system show distances
to objects on the Control Display. The contours
of distant objects are shown on the Control Dis-
play even before the acoustic signal sounds.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety
86
until "PDC" is selected and press the con-
troller.
6. Select "PDC display on" and press the con-
troller.
The PDC screen is activated.
The display is shown on the Control Display as
soon as PDC is activated.
System limitations
Even with PDC, final responsibility for
estimating the distance between the
vehicle and any obstructions always remains
with the driver. Even when sensors are pro-
vided, there is a blind spot in which objects can
no longer be detected. The system is also sub-
ject to the physical limits that apply to all forms
of ultrasonic measurement, such as those
encountered with trailer towbars and hitches,
thin or wedge-shaped objects, etc. Low objects
that have already been displayed, e.g. curbs,
can disappear again from the detection area of
the sensors before or after a continuous tone
sounds. Higher, protruding objects, e.g. ledges,
cannot be detected. Therefore, always drive
cautiously, otherwise there is a risk of personal
injury or property damage.
Loud sound sources outside or inside the car
can drown out the PDC signal.<
Driving stability control
systems
Your BMW has a number of systems that help
to maintain the vehicle's stability even in
adverse driving conditions.
ABS Antilock Brake System
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during
braking. Safe steering response is maintained
even during full braking. Active safety is thus
increased.
The ABS is operational every time you start the
engine. Braking safely, refer to page 122.
Electronic brake-force distribution
The system controls the brake pressure in the
rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior.
DBC Dynamic Brake Control
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically produces the maximum braking
force boost and thus helps to achieve the short-
est possible braking distance during full brak-
ing. This system exploits all of the benefits pro-
vided by ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake for the
duration of the full braking application.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
DSC prevents the driving wheels from losing
traction when you pull away from rest or accel-
erate. The system also recognizes unstable
driving conditions, for example if the rear of the
car is about to swerve or if momentum is acting
at an angle past the front wheels. In these
cases, DSC helps the vehicle maintain a safe
course within physical limits by reducing engine
output and through braking actions at the indi-
vidual wheels.
The laws of physics cannot be repealed,
even with DSC. An appropriate driving
style always remains the responsibility of the
driver. Therefore, do not reduce the additional
safety margin again by taking risks, as this could
result in an accident.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Controls
87
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Deactivating DSC
Press the button for at least 3 seconds; the indi-
cator lamps for DSC in the instrument cluster
light up. Dynamic Traction Control DTC and
DSC have been simultaneously deactivated.
Stabilizing and drive-output promoting actions
are no longer executed.
328i, 335i: in the same way as with a differential
interlock, even if DSC is deactivated, brake
actions are still performed on the rear axle to
enhance drive output if the drive wheels experi-
ence a significant loss of traction.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again
as soon as possible.
Activating DSC
Press the button again; the indicator lamps in
the instrument cluster go out.
For better control
If the indicator lamp flashes:
DSC controls the drive forces and
brake forces.
If the indicator lamps are on:
DSC is deactivated.
DTC Dynamic Traction Control
DTC is a version of DSC in which the drive out-
put is optimized for particular road conditions,
e.g. unplowed snow-covered roads. The sys-
tem assures the maximal drive output, but with
reduced driving stability. It is therefore neces-
sary to drive with appropriate caution.
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC
under the following special circumstances:
> When driving uphill on snow-covered roads,
in slush or on unplowed, snow-covered
roads
> When rocking a stuck vehicle free or start-
ing off in deep snow or on loose ground
> When driving with snow chains
Activating DTC
Press the button; the indicator lamps for DTC in
the instrument cluster come on.
For better control
If the indicator lamp flashes:
DTC controls the drive forces and
brake forces.
If the indicator lamps are on:
DTC has been activated.
Deactivating DTC
Press the button again; the DTC indicator
lamps in the instrument cluster go out.
xDrive*
xDrive is your BMW's four-wheel-drive system.
The combined efforts of xDrive and DSC help to
further optimize traction and driving dynamics.
The xDrive four-wheel-drive system distributes
driving power variably to the front and rear axles
depending on the driving situation and road
conditions.
HDC Hill Descent Control*
HDC is a downhill driving assistant that controls
your speed on steep downhill gradients and
makes it even easier to control your BMW's
handling under these conditions. The vehicle
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety
88
then moves slightly faster than double walking
speed without the driver needing to intervene.
HDC can be activated as long as you are driving
under approx. 20 mph or 35 km/h. When driving
downhill at a speed of under approx. 20 mph or
35 km/h, the vehicle's speed is automatically
reduced to slightly more than double walking
speed and maintained.
Increasing or decreasing speed
By accelerating or braking you can change this
speed within a range from approx. 3 to 15 mph,
approx. 5 to 25 km/h.
You can specify a target speed within the same
range using the cruise control
*
lever on the
steering column.
1 To increase speed
2 To decrease speed
Activating HDC
Press the button; the LED lights up.
When the vehicle is being braked automatically,
the LED flashes.
Deactivating HDC
Press the button again; the LED goes out.
HDC is automatically deactivated in the follow-
ing situations:
> At speeds above approx. 40 mph or
60 km/h
> After switching off the ignition.
Using HDC
In cars with manual transmission:
Use HDC in lower gears and in reverse gear.
With automatic transmission:
You can use HDC in any drive position.
Displays in the instrument cluster*
1 Display for target speed
2 HDC display
Malfunction
The HDC display disappears during HDC oper-
ation, or does not appear:
HDC is temporarily unavailable due to exces-
sive brake temperature, or DSC has failed.
Drive-off assistant
The drive-off assistant enables you to drive off
smoothly on uphill gradients. It is not necessary
to use the parking brake for this.
1. Hold the car in place by depressing the
brake.
2. Release the brake and drive off without
delay.
The drive-off assistant holds the car in
place for approx. 2 seconds after the
brake is released. Drive off without delay after
releasing the brake. Otherwise, the drive-off
assistant will no longer hold the car in place
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Controls
89
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
after approx. 2 seconds and the car will start to
roll backwards.<
Flat Tire Monitor FTM*
The concept
The Flat Tire Monitor detects pressure loss in a
tire by comparing the rotating speeds of the
individual tires while moving.
In the event of pressure loss, the rolling circum-
ference changes and, thus, the rotating speed
of the affected wheel. This change is detected
and is reported as a flat tire.
Functional requirement
In order to assure the reliable reporting of a flat
tire, the system must be initialized for the cor-
rect tire inflation pressure.
The system must be reinitialized each
time a tire inflation pressure has been cor-
rected or a wheel or tire has been changed.<
System limitations
The Flat Tire Monitor is unable to warn
the driver of sudden, severe tire damage
caused by external factors, nor can it identify
the gradual loss of pressure that will inevitably
occur in all four tires over a lengthy period of
time.<
In the following situations, the system could be
delayed or malfunction:
> System has not been initialized
> Driving on snowy or slippery road surface
> Performance-oriented style of driving: slip
in the drive wheels, high lateral acceleration
> Snow chains are attached
Initializing the system
The initialization is completed during driv-
ing, which can be interrupted at any time.
When driving resumes, the initialization is con-
tinued automatically.
Do not initialize the system while snow chains
are attached.<
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "FTM" is selected and press the con-
troller.
6. Start the engine, but do not start driving.
7. Select "Reset" and press the controller.
8. Select "Yes" and press the controller.
9. Start to drive.
Initialization is completed while the car is on
the move, without any feedback.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety
90
Indication of a flat tire
The warning lamps come on in yellow
and red. A message appears on the
Control Display. In addition, an
acoustic signal sounds. There is a flat
tire or substantial loss of tire pressure.
1. Cautiously reduce speed to below 50 mph
or 80 km/h. Avoid sudden braking and
steering maneuvers. Do not exceed a speed
of 50 mph or 80 km/h.
If the car is not equipped with Run-
Flat Tires, refer to page 219, the stan-
dard equipment by design, do not continue
driving. Otherwise a severe accident could
result if you continue driving.<
2. At the next opportunity, check the air pres-
sure in all four tires.
If all four tires are inflated to the cor-
rect pressures, the Flat Tire Monitor
might not have been initialized. The system
must then be initialized.<
3. In the event of complete tire pressure loss,
0 psi/0 kPa, you can estimate the possible
distance for continued driving on the basis
of the following guidelines:
> With a light load:
1 to 2 persons without luggage:
approx. 155 miles/250 km
> With a medium load:
2 persons, cargo bay full, or 4 persons
without luggage:
approx. 90 miles/150 km
> With a full load or when towing a trailer:
4 or more persons, cargo bay full:
approx. 30 miles/50 km
Drive cautiously and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph or 80 km/h, otherwise
there is a risk of an accident. In the event of
pressure loss, vehicle handling changes. This
includes reduced tracking stability in braking,
extended braking distance and altered natural
steering characteristics.
If unusual vibration or loud noises occur during
the journey, this may be an indication that the
damaged tire has finally failed. Reduce your
speed and pull over as soon as possible at a
suitable location. Otherwise parts of the tire
could come loose, resulting in an accident. Do
not continue driving. Instead, contact your
BMW center.<
Malfunction
The warning lamps come on in yel-
low. A message appears on the Con-
trol Display. The Flat Tire Monitor has
a malfunction or has failed. Have the
system checked as soon as possible.
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM*
The concept
TPM checks the inflation pressures of the four
mounted tires. The system notifies you if there
is a significant loss of pressure in one or more
tires.
Functional requirement
In order to assure the reliable reporting of a flat
tire, the system must be reset while all tire infla-
tion pressures are correct.
Always use wheels with TPM electronics. Oth-
erwise, the system may malfunction.
Each time a tire inflation pressure has
been corrected or a wheel or tire has been
changed, reset the system.<
System limitations
TPM cannot warn you in advance of sud-
den severe tire damage caused by out-
side influences.<
The system does not work correctly if it has not
been reset; for example, a flat tire may be indi-
cated even though the tire inflation pressures
are correct.
The system is inactive and cannot indicate a flat
tire if a wheel without TPM electronics, such as
a compact spare wheel, has been mounted, or if
TPM is temporarily malfunctioning due to other
systems or devices using the same radio fre-
quency.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Controls
91
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Status indicator on the Control Display
The color of the tires represents the status of
the tires and the system.
TPM takes into account that tire pressures
change while the vehicle is being driven. The
tire pressures do not need to be corrected
unless the TPM instructs you to do so by means
of color indicators.
Green
The tire inflation pressure corresponds to the
established target value.
"TPM active" appears on the Control Display.
One wheel yellow
There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire pres-
sure in the indicated tire. A message appears on
the Control Display.
All wheels yellow
There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire pres-
sure in several tires. A message appears on the
Control Display.
Gray
The system cannot detect a puncture.
Possible reasons for this:
> TPM is being reset
> Temporary malfunction caused by systems
or devices using the same radio frequency
> Malfunction
Resetting the system
Each time a tire inflation pressure has
been corrected or a wheel or tire has been
changed, reset the system.<
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button
The start menu is called up.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "TPM" is selected and press the con-
troller.
6. Start the engine, but do not start driving.
7. Select "Reset" and press the controller.
8. Select "Yes" and press the controller.
9. Start to drive.
The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting
TPM..." is displayed.
After driving a few minutes, the set inflation
pressures in the tires are accepted as the target
values to be monitored. The system reset is
completed during your drive, and can be inter-
will be adapted
will be adapted
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety
92
rupted at any time. When driving resumes, the
reset is continued automatically. On the Control
Display, the tires are shown in green and "Sta-
tus: TPM active" is displayed again.
If a flat tire is detected while the system is
resetting and determining the inflation
pressures, all tires on the Control Display are
displayed in yellow. The message "Tire low!" is
shown.<
Message for low tire inflation pressure
The warning lamps come on in yellow
and red. A message appears on the
Control Display. In addition, a signal
sounds. There is a flat tire or substan-
tial loss of tire pressure.
1. Cautiously reduce speed to below 50 mph/
80 km/h. Avoid sudden braking and steer-
ing maneuvers. Do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.
If the car is not equipped with Run-
Flat Tires, refer to page 219, the stan-
dard equipment by design, do not continue
driving. Otherwise a severe accident could
result after a tire puncture if you continue
driving.<
2. In the event of complete pressure loss,
0 psi/0 kPa, you can estimate the possible
distance for continued driving on the basis
of the following guidelines:
> With a light load:
1 to 2 persons without luggage:
approx. 155 miles/250 km
> With a medium load:
2 persons, cargo bay full, or 4 persons
without luggage:
approx. 95 miles/150 km
> With a full load:
4 or more persons, cargo bay full:
approx. 30 miles/50 km
Drive cautiously and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. In the event of
pressure loss, vehicle handling changes. This
includes reduced tracking stability in braking,
extended braking distance and altered natural
steering characteristics.
If unusual vibration or loud noises occur during
the journey, this may be an indication that the
damaged tire has finally failed. Reduce your
speed and pull over as soon as possible at a
suitable location. Otherwise parts of the tire
could come loose, resulting in an accident. Do
not continue driving. Instead, contact your
BMW center.<
Malfunction
The small warning lamp flashes in
yellow and then lights up continu-
ously; the larger warning lamp comes
on in yellow. On the Control Display,
the tires are shown in gray and a message
appears. No punctures can be detected.
his type of message is shown in the following
situations:
> If there is a malfunction
Have the system checked.
> If a wheel without TPM electronics has
been mounted
> If TPM is temporarily malfunctioning due to
other systems or devices using the same
radio frequency.
Message for unsuccessful system
reset
The warning lamp lights up yellow. A
message will appear on the Control
Display. The system is not reset after
a tire has been changed, for example.
Check the tire inflation pressure and reset the
system, refer to page 91.
Declaration according to NHTSA/
FMVSS 138
Tire Pressure Monitoring Systems
Each tire should be checked monthly when cold
and inflated to the inflation pressure recom-
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If
your vehicle has tires of a different size than the
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire infla-
tion pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires. As
an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Controls
93
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sys-
tem, TPMS, that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires are signif-
icantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the
low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible,
and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly underinflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and
tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s han-
dling and stopping ability. Please note that the
TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if underin-
flation has not reached the level at which the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale illuminates.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys-
tem detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously lit. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle startups as long as
the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Active steering*
The concept
Active steering varies the turning angle of the
front wheels in relation to steering wheel move-
ments. It also varies the steering force required
to turn the wheels depending on the speed at
which you are driving.
When you are driving in the low road-speed
range, e.g. in a town or when parking, the steer-
ing angle increases, i.e. the steering becomes
very direct, and less effort is required to turn the
wheels. In the higher speed range, on the other
hand, the steering angle is reduced more and
more. This improves the handling capability of
your BMW over the entire speed range.
In critical situations, the system can make tar-
geted corrections to the steering angle pro-
vided by the driver and thus stabilize the vehicle
before the driver intervenes. This stabilizing
intervention is simultaneously deactivated
when DSC is switched off, refer to page 87.
Malfunction
The warning lamps come on. Active
steering is no longer operational. At
low speeds, greater steering wheel
movements are required, whereas at
higher speeds the vehicle reacts more sensi-
tively to steering wheel movements. The stabil-
ity-enhancing feature may also be deactivated.
Drive cautiously and think well ahead. Have the
system checked.
Brake Force Display
On the left: normal braking
On the right: sharp braking
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety
94
Airbags
The following airbags are located under the
marked covers:
1 Front airbags
2 Head airbags, front and rear
3 Side airbags in the seat backrests
Protective action
Observe the adjustment instructions on
page 43 to ensure the best possible per-
sonal protection.<
The front airbags help protect the driver and
front passenger by responding to frontal
impacts in which safety belts alone cannot pro-
vide adequate restraint. When needed, the
head and side airbags help provide protection in
the event of side impact. The relevant side air-
bag supports the side upper body area. The
head air bag supports the head.
The airbags have been designed to not be trig-
gered in every collision situation, e.g. not in
minor accidents or rear-end collisions.
Do not apply adhesive materials to the
cover panels of the airbags, cover them or
modify them in any other way. Do not attach
seat covers, cushions or other objects not spe-
cifically approved for seats with integral side air-
bags to the front seats. Do not hang items of
clothing such as coats or jackets over the back-
rests. Do not attempt to remove the airbag
retention system from the vehicle. Do not mod-
ify the individual components of the system or
its wiring in any way. This includes the uphol-
stered covers on the steering wheel, instrument
panel, seats and roof posts, as well as the sides
of the roof lining. Do not attempt to remove or
dismantle the steering wheel.
Do not touch the individual components imme-
diately after the system has been triggered,
because there is a danger of burns.
In the event of malfunctions, deactivation or
triggering of the airbag restraint system, have
the testing, repair, removal and disposal of air-
bag generators executed only by a BMW center
or a workshop that works according to repair
procedures of BMW with correspondingly
trained personnel and that has the required
explosives licenses. Unprofessional attempts to
work on the system could lead to failure in an
emergency or to undesired airbag activation,
either of which could result in personal injury.<
Warning notices and information about the air-
bags can also be found on the sun visors.
Automatic deactivation of the front
passenger airbags
An analysis of the impression in the front pas-
senger seat cushion determines whether and
how the seat is occupied. The front and side air-
bags for the front passenger are activated or
deactivated by the system accordingly.
The indicator lamp above the interior
rearview mirror shows the current status
of the front passenger airbags, deactivated or
activated, refer to Status of front passenger air-
bags below.
Before transporting a child on the front
passenger seat, read the safety precau-
tions and handling instructions under Trans-
porting children safely, refer to page 52.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Controls
95
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
The front and side airbags can also be deacti-
vated by adolescents and adults sitting in cer-
tain positions; the indicator lamp for the front
passenger airbags comes on. In such cases, the
passenger should change his or her sitting
position so that the front passenger airbags are
activated and the indicator lamp goes out. If the
desired airbag status cannot be achieved by
changing the sitting position, transport the rele-
vant passenger on a rear seat. Do not attach
seat covers, seat cushion padding, ball mats or
other items to the front passenger seat unless
they are specifically recommended by BMW.
Do not place any items under the seat which
could press against the seat from below. Other-
wise a correct analysis of the seat cushion is not
ensured.<
Status of front passenger airbags
The indicator lamp for the front passenger air-
bags shows the functional status of the front
passenger's front and side airbags in accor-
dance with whether and how the front passen-
ger seat is occupied. The indicator lamp shows
whether the front passenger airbags are acti-
vated or deactivated.
> The indicator lamp lights up when a child in
a specially designated child-restraint sys-
tem is detected, as intended, on the seat.
The front and side airbags for the front pas-
senger are not activated.
Most child seats are detected by the
system, especially child seats
required by the NHTSA at the time of vehi-
cle production. After mounting a child seat,
ensure that the indicator lamp for the front
passenger airbag is lit. It indicates that the
child seat has been detected and that the
front passenger airbags are deactivated.
> The indicator lamp does not come on as
long as a person of sufficient size and in a
correct sitting position is detected on the
seat.
The front and side airbags for the front pas-
senger are activated.
> The indicator lamp does not come on if the
seat is empty.
The front and side airbags for the front pas-
senger are not activated.
Operational readiness of airbag system
As of radio readiness, refer to page 56, the
warning lamp comes on briefly to indicate that
the entire airbag system and the belt tensioners
are operational.
Airbag system malfunction
> Warning lamp does not light up at radio
readiness or beyond.
> Warning lamp remains permanently on.
In the event of a fault in the airbag system,
have it checked without delay, otherwise
there is the risk that the system will not function
as intended even if a sufficiently severe acci-
dent occurs.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Lamps
96
Lamps
Parking lamps/low beams
0 Lamps off,
daytime running lamps
1 Parking lamps and daytime running lamps
2 Low-beam headlamps and welcome lamps
3 Automatic headlamp control
*
, daytime run-
ning lamps, welcome lamps and Adaptive
Head Light
*
When you open the driver's door with the igni-
tion switched off, the exterior lighting is auto-
matically switched off if the light switch is in
position 0, 2 or 3.
Switch on the parking lamps if necessary,
switch position 1.
Parking lamps
In switch position 1, the front, rear and side
vehicle lighting is switched on. You can use the
parking lamps for parking.
When the ignition is switched off and the switch
is in position 1, only the outside sections of the
rear lamps are illuminated, refer to page 231.
The parking lamps will discharge the bat-
tery. Therefore, do not leave them on for
unduly long periods of time, otherwise the bat-
tery might not have enough power to start the
engine. It is preferable to switch on the left-
hand or right-hand roadside parking lamps,
refer to page 98.<
Low beams
The low beams light up when the light switch is
in position 2 and the ignition is on.
Automatic headlamp control*
When the switch is in position 3, the low beams
are switched on and off automatically depend-
ing on ambient light conditions, e.g. in a tunnel,
in twilight, or if there is precipitation. The Adap-
tive Head Light
*
is active. The LED next to the
symbol is illuminated when the low beams are
on. You can also activate the daytime running
lamps, refer to page 97. In the situations
described above, the lamps then automatically
switch from daytime running lamps to low
beams.
The headlamps may also come on when the
sun is sitting low on a blue sky.
The low beams remain switched on inde-
pendent of the ambient lighting condi-
tions when you switch on the fog lamps
*
.<
The automatic headlamp control cannot
serve as a substitute for your personal
judgment in determining when the lamps
should be switched on in response to ambient
lighting conditions. For example, the system
cannot detect fog or hazy weather. To avoid
safety risks, you should always switch on the
low-beam headlamps manually under these
conditions.<
Welcome lamps
If you leave the light switch in position 2 or 3
when you park the car, the parking lamps and
the interior lamps light up briefly when you
unlock the vehicle.
Activating/deactivating welcome
lamps
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Controls
97
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Lighting" is selected and press the
controller.
6. Select "Welcome light" and press the con-
troller.
The welcome lamps are switched on.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Pathway lighting
If you activate the headlamp flasher after park-
ing the car, with the lights switched off, the low
beams come on and remain on for a certain
time.
You can adjust the operating period or deacti-
vate the function.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. Select "Lighting" and press the controller.
6. Select "Pathway lighting" and press the
controller.
7. Turn the controller to select the corre-
sponding duration.
8. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Daytime running lamps
The daytime running lamps light up in switch
positions 0, 1 and 3.
Activating/deactivating daytime
running lamps
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. Select "Lighting" and press the controller.
6. Select "Daytime running lamps" and press
the controller.
The daytime running lamps are
switched on.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Lamps
98
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Adaptive Head Light*
The concept
Adaptive Head Light is a variable headlamp
control system that enables better illumination
of the road surface. Depending on the steering
angle and other parameters, the light from the
headlamp follows the course of the road.
Activating Adaptive Head Light
With the ignition switched on, turn the light
switch to position 3, refer to page 96.
To avoid dazzling the drivers of oncoming vehi-
cles, Adaptive Head Light is not active when the
car is driven in reverse, and directs the light to
the front passenger's side when the vehicle is at
a standstill.
Malfunction
The LED next to the symbol for automatic head-
lamp control flashes. Adaptive Head Light is
malfunctioning or has failed. Have the system
checked as soon as possible.
High beams/roadside parking
lamps
1 High beams
2 Headlamp flasher
3 Roadside parking lamps
*
Roadside parking lamps, left or right*
There is an additional option of switching on the
lamps on the side of the car facing the road
when parked.
Switching on
After parking the vehicle, press the lever up or
down beyond the pressure point for a longer
period, arrow 3.
The roadside parking lamps drain the bat-
tery. Therefore, do not leave them on for
unduly long periods of time, otherwise the bat-
tery might not have enough power to start the
engine.<
Switching off
Press the lever in the opposite direction to the
pressure point, arrow 3.
Fog lamps*
The parking lamps or low beams must
be switched on for the fog lamps to
operate. The green indicator lamp in
the instrument cluster lights up whenever the
fog lamps are on.
The fog lamps are switched off while you acti-
vate the headlamp flasher or switch on the high
beams.
If the automatic headlamp control is acti-
vated, the low beams will come on auto-
matically when you switch on the fog lamps.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Controls
99
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Instrument lighting
You can adjust the brightness of the instrument
lighting only when the parking lamps or the low
beams are switched on.
1. Push button 1 up or down repeatedly until
the appropriate symbol appears in the dis-
play, accompanied by the brightness set-
ting and scale the word "SET".
2. Press button 2.
3. Push button 1 up or down to select the
desired brightness level.
4. Press button 2 in the turn indicator lever.
The display again shows the outside tem-
perature and the time.
Interior lamps
The interior lamps, footwell lamps
*
, entry
lamps
*
, cargo bay lamp and courtesy lamps
*
are controlled automatically.
The LEDs for the courtesy lamps
are set in the
door handles and illuminate the ground in front
of the doors.
To avoid draining the battery, all lamps
inside the car are switched off about
8 minutes after the ignition is switched off, refer
to Start/stop button on page 56.<
Switching interior lamps on/off
manually
Interior lamps, front and rear
*
:
To switch on and off, press the button.
To switch off the interior lamps, footwell
lamps
*
, entry lamps
*
and courtesy lamps
*
per-
manently, press the button for the front interior
lamps for about 3 seconds.
Reading lamps
There are reading lamps at the front and rear
*
,
next to the interior lamps. To switch on and off,
press the button.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Climate
100
Climate
1 Airflow directed toward the windshield and
side windows
2 Air to the upper body area
Draft-free ventilation 103
3 Air to the footwell
4 Air distribution, manual
5 Temperature adjustment, left-hand side of
passenger compartment
6 Maximum cooling
7 AUTO program
8 Air flow rate, manual
9 AUC Automatic recirculated-air control/
Recirculated-air mode
10 Temperature adjustment, right-hand side
of passenger compartment
11 Residual heat
12 Defrosting windows and removing conden-
sation
13 Switching cooling function on/off manually
14 Rear window defroster
15 Air grill for interior temperature sensor –
please keep clear and unobstructed
The current setting for the air distribution is dis-
played on the Control Display, refer to
page 101.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Controls
101
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Automatic climate control
Comfortable interior climate
AUTO program 7 offers the ideal air distribution
and air flow rate for almost all conditions, refer
to AUTO program below. All you need to do is
select an interior temperature which is comfort-
able for you.
The following sections inform you in detail
about how to adjust the settings.
Most settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile
settings on page 28.
Adjusting air distribution manually
The air distribution can be
switched on and off manually. The
air is directed to the windshield, to
the upper body area and to the
footwell. Automatic air distribution adjustment
is deactivated.
You can switch the automatic air distribution
back on by pressing the AUTO button. This
automatically switches on the cooling function
as well.
Fine adjustments to manual air
distribution
You can set the rate of incoming airflow for
manual air distribution.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the left to open "Cli-
mate".
3. Select "Vent settings" and press the con-
troller.
4. Select the desired field.
5. Turn the controller to set the air distribution.
1 Airflow directed toward the windshield and
side windows
2 Air to the upper body area
3 Air to the footwell
Temperature
Set the desired temperatures indi-
vidually for the driver's and front
passenger's sides.
The automatic climate control
achieves this temperature as quickly as possi-
ble regardless of the season, using maximum
cooling or heating power if necessary, and then
maintains it.
When you switch between different tem-
perature settings in quick succession, the
automatic climate control does not have
enough time to achieve the set temperature.<
You can achieve maximum heating power with
the highest setting, regardless of the outside
temperature.
The lowest setting effects continuous cooling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Climate
102
Maximum cooling
At outside temperatures above
32 7/0 6 and when the engine is
running, you obtain a maximum
cooling effect as soon as possible.
The automatic climate control goes into recir-
culated-air mode at the lowest temperature. Air
flows at maximum rate from the vents for the
upper body area. You should therefore open
them for maximum cooling.
AUTO program
The AUTO program adjusts the air
distribution to the windshield and
side windows, towards the upper
body area and into the footwell for you. The air
flow rate and your temperature specifications
will be adapted to outside influences as a result
of seasonal changes, e.g. sunlight or window
condensation.
The cooling is switched on automatically with
the AUTO program.
Intensity of the AUTO program
Press the AUTO button repeatedly to set the
intensity of the AUTO program. The current
setting is briefly displayed on the Control Dis-
play every time the button is pressed.
You can also set the intensity of the AUTO pro-
gram via iDrive.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the left to call up "Cli-
mate".
3. Select "Automatic programs" and press the
controller.
4. Select the desired intensity and press the
controller.
The selected intensity level of the auto-
matic program is switched on.
Adjusting air flow rate manually
Press the left side of the button to
reduce airflow. Press the right side
of the button to increase it.
You can reactivate the automatic mode for the
air flow rate with the AUTO button.
The air flow rate may be reduced or the blower
may be switched off entirely to save on battery
power. The display remains the same.
Switching the system on/off
With the blower at its lowest setting, press the
left side of the button to switch off the auto-
matic climate control. All displays are cleared
except for the rear window defroster if it is
switched on.
Press any button except REST or rear window
defroster to reactivate the automatic climate
control.
AUC Automatic recirculated-air
control/Recirculated-air mode
Switch on the desired operating
mode by pressing this button
repeatedly:
> LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
> Left-hand LED on, AUC mode: a sensor
detects pollutants in the outside air. If nec-
essary, the system blocks the supply of out-
side air and recirculates the inside air. As
soon as the concentration of pollutants in
the outside air has decreased sufficiently,
the system automatically switches back to
outside air supply.
> Right-hand LED on, recirculated-air mode:
the supply of outside air is permanently
shut off. The system then recirculates the
air currently within the vehicle.
If condensation starts to form on the
inside window surfaces during operation
in the recirculated-air mode, you should switch
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Controls
103
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
it off while also increasing the air flow rate as
required.
The recirculated-air mode should not be used
over an extended period of time, otherwise the
air quality inside the car will deteriorate contin-
uously.<
Via the button* on the steering wheel
You can switch quickly between the recircu-
lated-air mode and the previous mode using an
individually programmable button
on the steer-
ing wheel, refer to page 11.
Residual heat
The heat stored in the engine is
used to heat the passenger com-
partment, e.g. while stopped at a
school to pick up a child.
The function can be switched on when the fol-
lowing conditions are met:
> Up to 15 minutes after the engine has been
switched off
> While the engine is at operating tempera-
ture
> As long as battery voltage is sufficient
> At an outside temperature below 77 7/
25 6
The LED is lit when the function is on.
As of radio readiness, you can set the interior
temperature, the air flow rate and the air distri-
bution.
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Quickly removes ice and conden-
sation from the windshield and
front side windows.
Switch on the cooling function as well.
Switching cooling function on/off
The cooling function cools and
dehumidifies the incoming air
before reheating it as required,
according to the temperature setting. This
function is only available while the engine is
running.
The cooling function helps prevent condensa-
tion on the windows or removes it quickly.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog over briefly when the engine is started.
The cooling function is automatically switched
on along with the AUTO program.
Rear window defroster
The defroster is switched off auto-
matically after a certain time.
Depending on your vehicle's
equipment, the upper wires serve as an antenna
and are not part of the rear window defroster.
Ventilation
1 Use the knurled wheels to smoothly open
and close the air vents
2 Use the lever to change the direction of the
airflow
3 Knurled wheel for more or less cool air from
the vents for the upper body area
Ventilation for cooling
Adjust the vent outlets to direct the flow of cool
air in your direction, for instance if it has become
too hot in the car.
Draft-free ventilation
Set the vent outlets so that the air flows past
you and not straight at you.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Climate
104
Ventilation in the rear
1 Use the knurled wheel to smoothly open
and close the air vents
2 Use the knurled wheel to adjust the temper-
ature:
> Turn toward blue: colder
> Turn toward red: warmer
3 Use the lever to change the direction of the
airflow
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
The microfilter traps dust and pollen in the
incoming air. The activated-charcoal filter pro-
vides additional protection by filtering gaseous
pollutants from the outside air. Your BMW cen-
ter replaces this combined filter during routine
maintenance.
Parked car ventilation
The concept
The parked car ventilation provides ventilation
to the passenger compartment and lowers its
temperature, if necessary. It is ready for use at
any outside temperature, as of radio readiness.
The parked car ventilation remains switched on
for 30 minutes. Two different switch-on times
can be preselected. The system can also be
switched on and off directly.
Due to its high power consumption, it should
not be switched on twice in a row without driv-
ing in between to allow the battery to recharge.
The air emerges from the air vents for the upper
body area in the instrument panel. The air vents
must therefore be open.
The parked car ventilation system is operated
via iDrive.
Switching on/off directly
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the left to open "Cli-
mate".
3. Select "Parked car operation" and press the
controller.
4. Select "Automatic ventilation" and press
the controller.
5. Select "Parked car ventilation" and press
the controller.
The parked car ventilation is switched on.
The symbol on the automatic climate control
display flashes.
Preselecting switch-on times
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the left to open "Cli-
mate".
3. Select "Parked car operation" and press the
controller.
4. Select "Activation time" and press the con-
troller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Controls
105
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
5. Move the controller to the left or right to
select "Timer 1" or "Timer 2".
6. Select the time and press the controller.
The first time setting is selected.
7. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
8. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The next setting is highlighted.
9. Make the remaining adjustments. After the
last adjustment, the time is stored.
Activating switch-on times
Move the controller to the left or right to select
"Timer 1" or "Timer 2" and then press the con-
troller.
The switch-on time is activated.
The symbol on the automatic climate control
display lights up.
The symbol on the automatic climate control
display flashes when the system has switched
on.
The respective system is switched on
within the next 24 hours only. After these
have elapsed, it must be reactivated.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
106
Practical interior accessories
Integrated universal remote
control*
The concept
The integrated universal remote control can
replace as many as three hand-held transmit-
ters for various remote-controlled devices,
such as garage doors and gates or lighting sys-
tems. The integrated universal remote control
registers and stores signals from the original
hand-held transmitters.
The signal of an original hand-held transmitter
can be programmed on one of the three mem-
ory buttons 1. After this, the programmed
memory button 1 will operate the system in
question. The LED 2 flashes to confirm trans-
mission of the signal.
Should you sell your vehicle one day, be sure to
delete the stored programs beforehand for your
safety, refer to page 107.
To prevent possible damage or injury,
before programming or using the inte-
grated universal remote control, always inspect
the immediate area to make certain that no peo-
ple, animals or objects are within the pivoting or
travel range of the device being operated. Com-
ply also with the safety instructions supplied
with the original hand-held transmitter.<
Checking compatibility
If this symbol appears on the package
or in the instructions supplied with the
original hand-held transmitter, you can
assume that the radio remote control device will
be compatible with the integrated universal
remote control.
For additional information, please contact your
BMW center or call: 1-800-355-3515.
You can also obtain information on the Internet
at:
www.bmwusa.com or
www.homelink.com.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson
Controls, Inc.<
Programming
1 Memory buttons
2 LED
Fixed-code hand-held transmitters
1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 56.
2. When starting operation for the first time:
Press the left and right memory buttons 1
for approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2
flashes rapidly. The three memory buttons
are cleared.
3. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at a
distance of approx. 4 to 12 in/10 to 30 cm
from the memory buttons 1.
The required distance between the
hand-held transmitter and the mem-
ory buttons 1 depends on the system of the
respective original hand-held transmitter
used.<
4. Simultaneously press the transmit key on
the original hand-held transmitter and the
desired memory button 1 on the integrated
universal remote control. The LED 2 flashes
slowly at first. As soon as the LED 2 flashes
rapidly, release both buttons. If the LED 2
does not flash rapidly after approx. 15 sec-
onds, alter the distance and repeat this
step.
5. To program other original hand-held trans-
mitters, repeat steps 3 and 4.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Controls
107
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
The corresponding memory button 1 is now
programmed with the signal of the original
hand-held transmitter.
You can operate the device while the ignition is
switched off.
If the device fails to function even after
repeated programming, check whether
the original hand-held transmitter uses an alter-
nating-code system. To do so, either read the
instructions for the original hand-held transmit-
ter or hold down the programmed memory
button 1 of the integrated universal remote
control. If the LED 2 on the integrated universal
remote control flashes rapidly and then remains
lit for about two seconds, the original hand-held
transmitter uses an alternating-code system. If
it uses an alternating-code system, program
the memory buttons 1 as described under
Alternating-code hand-held transmitters.<
Alternating-code hand-held
transmitters
To program the integrated universal remote
control, consult the operating instructions for
the device to be set. You will find information
there on the possibilities for synchronization.
When programming hand-held transmitters
that employ an alternating code, please observe
the following supplementary instructions:
Programming will be easier with the aid of
a second person.<
1. Park your vehicle within the range of the
remote-controlled device.
2. Program the integrated universal remote
control as described above in the section
Fixed-code hand-held transmitters.
3. Locate the button on the receiver of the
device to be set, e.g. on the drive unit.
4. Press the button on the receiver of the
device to be set. After step 4, you have
approx. 30 seconds for step 5.
5. Press the programmed memory button 1 of
the integrated universal remote control
three times.
The corresponding memory button 1 is now
programmed with the signal of the original
hand-held transmitter.
If you have any questions, please contact
your BMW center.<
Deleting all stored programs
Press the left and right memory buttons 1 for
approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes rap-
idly: all stored programs are deleted.
Reassigning individual programs
1. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at a
distance of approx. 4 to 12 in/10 to 30 cm
from the memory buttons 1.
The required distance between the
hand-held transmitter and the mem-
ory buttons 1 depends on the system of the
respective original hand-held transmitter
used.<
2. Press the desired memory button 1 of the
integrated universal remote control.
3. If the LED 2 flashes slowly after approx.
20 seconds, press the transmit key of the
original hand-held transmitter. Release
both buttons as soon as the LED 2 flashes
rapidly. If the LED 2 does not flash rapidly
after approx. 15 seconds, alter the distance
and repeat this step.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
108
Digital compass*
1 Adjustment button
2 Display
The display shows you the main or secondary
compass direction in which you are driving.
Operating principle
You can call up various functions by pressing
the adjustment button with a pointed object
such as a pen or similar item. The following
adjustment options are displayed one after the
other, depending on how long you keep the
adjustment button pressed:
> Press briefly: switch display on/off
> 3 to 6 seconds: set the compass zone
> 6 to 9 seconds: calibrate the compass
> 9 to 12 seconds: set left-hand/right-hand
steering
> 12 to 15 seconds: set the language
Setting compass zones
Set the compass zone corresponding to your
vehicle's geographic location so that the com-
pass can function correctly; refer to the world
map with compass zones.
To set the compass zone, press the adjustment
button for approx. 3-4 seconds. The number of
the compass zone set is shown in the display.
To change the zone setting, briefly press the
adjustment button repeatedly until the display
shows the number of the compass zone corre-
sponding to your current location.
The compass is operational again after approx.
10 seconds.
Calibrating the digital compass
The digital compass must be calibrated in the
following situations:
> An incorrect compass direction is shown.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Controls
109
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
> The compass direction shown does not
change although the direction of travel
does.
> Not all compass directions are shown.
Procedure
1. Make sure that no large metal objects or
overhead power lines are in the vicinity of
your vehicle and that you have enough
space to drive in a circle.
2. Set the currently valid compass zone.
3. Press the adjustment button for approx.
6-7 seconds to call up C. Then drive in at
least one full circle at a speed of no more
than 4 mph or 7 km/h.
If calibration is successful, the display
changes from C to a compass direction.
Setting right-hand/left-hand steering
Your digital compass is factory-set to right-
hand or left-hand steering, in accordance with
your vehicle.
Setting the language
You can set the language of the display:
Press the adjustment button for approx.
12-13 seconds. Briefly press the adjustment
button again to switch between English, "E",
and German, "O".
The setting is automatically saved after approx.
10 seconds.
Roller sun blinds*
Rear window blind
Tap the button in the center console to raise or
lower the roller sun blind.
Roller sun blinds for rear side windows
Pull loop of roller sun blind and hook onto
bracket.
Do not open the window when the roller
sun blind has been pulled up, otherwise
there is a risk of damage at high speeds that
may result in personal injury.<
Glove compartment
Opening
Pull the handle.
The light in the glove compartment comes on.
To prevent injury in the event of an acci-
dent while the vehicle is being driven,
close the glove compartment immediately after
use.<
Closing
Fold cover up.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
110
Locking
To lock the glove compartment, use the inte-
grated key of the remote control, refer to
page 28.
LED hand lamp
In a holder on the left side of the glove compart-
ment.
Insert the hand lamp into the holder with
the lens pointing toward the passenger
compartment to ensure that the lamp cannot be
switched on accidentally.<
Center armrest
Storage compartment
The center armrest between the front seats
contains either a compartment or the cover for
the snap-in adapter
*
, depending on the equip-
ment version. For more information about this
mobile phone base plate refer to the separate
Owner's Manual.
Opening
Press the button, see arrow.
Ventilated storage compartment
The storage compartment in the center armrest
can be ventilated: slide the switch backwards.
The temperature is controlled via the knurled
wheel for adjusting the temperature of air venti-
lating the rear of the passenger compartment,
refer to page 104.
Connection for external audio device
You can connect an external audio device such
as a CD or MP3 player and play audio tracks
over the car's loudspeaker system:
> AUX-In port, refer to page 175
> USB-audio interface
*
, refer to page 176
Storage compartments inside
the vehicle
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, you
will find compartments beside the steering col-
umn
*
, in the front doors and in the center con-
sole
*
.
There are nets
*
on the front-seat backrests.
Clothes hooks
There are clothes hooks on the grab handles in
the rear passenger compartment.
Items of clothing hung from the hooks
must not obstruct the driver's view. Do
not hang heavy objects from the hooks, other-
wise they could endanger the car's occupants,
e.g. in case of heavy braking or sudden swerv-
ing.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Controls
111
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Cup holders
Use lightweight and shatterproof contain-
ers and do not transport hot beverages,
otherwise there is an increased risk of injury in
the event of the accident. Do not force contain-
ers that are too large into the cup holders, oth-
erwise damage could result.<
Front
Opening
Briefly press the center of the cover.
Closing
Briefly press the cover in the center and push in
the cup holder.
Ashtray, front
Opening
Push the ridge on the cover.
Emptying
Lift out the insert.
Lighter
With the engine running or the ignition switched
on, press in the cigarette lighter.
The lighter can be pulled out as soon as it pops
back out.
Hold or touch the hot cigarette lighter by
the knob only. Holding or touching it in
other areas could result in burns.
When leaving the car, always remove the
remote control so that children cannot operate
the cigarette lighter and burn themselves.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
112
Ashtray, rear
Opening
Push the ridge on the cover.
Emptying
Lift out the insert.
Connecting electrical
appliances
In your BMW, when the engine is running or the
ignition is switched on, you can use electrical
devices such as a flashlight, car vacuum
cleaner, etc., up to approx. 200 watts at
12 volts, as long as one of the following sockets
is available. Avoid damaging the sockets by
attempting to insert plugs of unsuitable shape
or size.
Cigarette lighter socket*
To access the socket: take the cigarette lighter
out of the socket.
Socket in the center armrest
External audio device, refer to page 110.
Sockets in the rear center console*
Remove corresponding cover.
Socket in the cargo bay*
Sedan
Sports Wagon
Open the cap.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Controls
113
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Sedan:
Through-loading system*
Opening
1. Open the belt lock of the rear center safety
belt. To do so, press the button, see arrow,
and release the latch plate.
2. Insert the latch plate at the end of the belt
into the specially designated fixture on the
rear window shelf.
3. Push the corresponding head restraint
down as far as it will go, refer to page 46.
4. To release the rear seat backrest, pull the
corresponding lever in the cargo bay.
5. The unlocked rear seat backrest moves for-
ward slightly. Fold the backrest forward by
the head restraint.
Closing
1. Return the rear seat backrest to its upright
position and engage it.
When returning the backrest into its
seating position, make sure that the
seat's locking mechanism engages prop-
erly. Otherwise, cargo could be thrown
around in the event of sharp braking or
swerving and endanger the occupants.<
2. Release the latch plate from the fixture on
the rear window shelf and insert it into the
belt lock of the center safety belt. Make sure
you hear the latch plate engage in the belt
buckle.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
114
The lashing eyes in the cargo bay provide you
with a way to attach cargo bay nets
*
or draw
straps for securing suitcases and luggage, refer
to page 124.
Sports Wagon:
Cargo bay
Roll-up cover
Pull out the cover and hook it into the retaining
fixtures.
Do not place objects on the cover, other-
wise they could endanger the car's occu-
pants, e.g. in the case of braking or sudden
swerving.
Do not let the cover retract, otherwise it could
be damaged.<
The roll-up cover is raised when the rear
window or tailgate is opened
*
. Before
closing the rear window or tailgate, press the
roll-up cover downward until it engages.<
Expanding the cargo bay
The rear seat backrest is divided. You can fold
down either division in order to expand the
cargo bay.
Reach into the recess and pull forwards.
When folding the backrest back up, make
sure that the catch engages properly. If
you cannot see a red warning area in the recess,
the catch is properly engaged. Otherwise,
cargo can be thrown around inside the passen-
ger compartment and endanger the car's occu-
pants, e.g. in the case of braking or sudden
swerving.<
Observe the instructions concerning the
safety belt on page 43 to ensure the best
possible personal protection.<
Partition net
Do not let the partition net retract, other-
wise there is a risk of danger and the par-
tition net could be damaged.<
Use the loop strap to pull the partition net out of
the casing. Grip the bar on both ends and insert
it into the retaining fixtures, arrow 1. This can
best be done from the rear seat.
When you no longer require the partition net,
grip both ends of the bar and take it out of the
retaining fixtures, arrow 2. Let the partition net
slide into the casing slowly.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Controls
115
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
With cargo bay expanded
1. Fold down both rear seat backrests, refer to
Expanding the cargo bay.
2. Use the buttons to unlatch the casing on
both sides, arrow 1.
3. Pull the casing out backwards, arrow 2,
without tilting it.
4. Slide the casing into the guides on the
backs of the seat backrests.
5. Carefully pull out the partition net and insert
it into the front retaining fixtures, refer to
Partition net above. This can best be done
from the front seat.
Follow the same steps in reverse order to return
the partition net and seats to their original posi-
tions. Finally, slide the casing into both retaining
fixtures on the sides until it engages. Tug on the
casing to check if it is properly locked in place.
Storage compartments inside
the cargo bay
Sedan
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the
following storage spaces can be found in the
cargo bay:
> Left storage compartment, e.g. for storing a
box of cleaning tissues or up to 12 CD jack-
ets, depending on vehicle equipment ver-
sion
> Net
*
for securing smaller objects, to be
attached to the fixtures on the floor panel
> Hooks for hanging up, e.g., shopping bags
or tote bags
> Rubber strap on the left trim panel for
securing small objects such as a folding
umbrella
> Net for small objects on the right trim panel
of the cargo bay
> Retaining straps next to the rear lashing
eyes, e.g. for securing an umbrella
> Folding, removable box
*
under the floor
panel, e.g. for wet or dirty items
> Stowage compartment under the floor
panel
> Insertable dividers
*
and removable storage
tray for the storage compartment under the
floor panel
> Drawer for storing small items. Pull the han-
dle firmly to release the drawer. If neces-
sary, you can pull out the drawer entirely,
refer to the information below
Do not drive or close the luggage com-
partment lid while the drawer is pulled
out.
On uphill gradients, release the drawer with
caution, otherwise it could slide out on its own
and cause injury.
Do not exceed a maximum load of 11 lbs/5 kg
for the drawer, otherwise damage could
result.<
Removing the drawer
1. Push the drawer all the way in.
2. Turn the catches on the left and right all the
way out.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
116
3. Remove the drawer by pulling it down and
backwards.
Reinserting the drawer
1. Hook the guides of the drawer into the front
of the yellow guide aids on the bottom of the
cargo bay.
2. Insert the catches into the mounts on the
bottom of the cargo bay.
3. Turn the catches on the left and right all the
way in.
Sports Wagon
The following storage spaces can be found in
the cargo bay:
> Umbrella holder on the bottom of the parti-
tion net casing
> Rubber strap on the left and right trim panel
for securing small objects such as a folding
umbrella
> Hooks for hanging up shopping bags or tote
bags, for example, on the left and right-hand
sides of the cargo bay
> Net for small objects on the right trim panel
of the cargo bay
> Stowage compartment under the floor
panel
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, other
storage spaces can be found in the cargo bay:
> Net
*
for securing smaller objects, to be
attached to the fixtures on the floor panel
> Net
*
on the left side trim of the cargo bay
instead of the rubber strap
> Reversible cargo area floor panel with inte-
grated plastic cover
*
for cargo bay or
bumper
> Folding, removable box
*
under the floor
panel, e.g. for wet or dirty items
> Insertable dividers
*
and removable storage
tray for the storage compartment under the
floor panel
Folding up the floor panel
Do not exceed the maximum permissible
load of 55 lbs/25 kg for the storage com-
partment under the floor panel, otherwise dam-
age could result.<
Sedan
Press the floor panel against the ceiling of the
cargo bay; a locking device holds the floor panel
in place. To detach the floor panel, pull it out of
the locking device.
Equipment version with drawer:
Take the retaining strap on the right-hand side
of the drawer out of the bracket and use it to fix
the floor panel in place.
Sports Wagon
Fold up the floor panel and take it out or lean it
forward.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Controls
117
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Lashing eyes
You will find lashing eyelets in the cargo bay for
securing luggage items with nets or tensioning
straps, refer to page 124.
Ski bag*
The ski bag is designed for safe, clean transport
of up to 4 pairs of standard skis or up to
2snowboards.
With the ski bag you can stow skis with a length
of up to 6ft 10in/2.10m. When skis of 6ft 10in/
2.10 m length are loaded, the overall capacity of
the ski bag is reduced due to its tapered design.
Loading
1. Fold down the center armrest.
2. Press the button, reach into the recess and
fold down the cover.
3. Open the Velcro fastener, spread the ski
bag between the front seats and insert the
skis or snowboards.
The zip fastener makes objects in the ski
bag easier to reach.
4. Insert the latch plate of the ski bag's retain-
ing strap in the center belt buckle.
Only place clean skis in the ski bag. Wrap sharp
edges to prevent damage.
Securing cargo
After loading, secure the ski bag and its con-
tents. Tighten the retaining strap on the ten-
sioning buckle for this purpose.
Secure the ski bag in the manner
described, otherwise it could endanger
the car's occupants, e.g. in case of heavy brak-
ing or sudden swerving.<
To store the ski bag, perform the steps
described for loading in reverse order.
Removing the ski bag
The ski bag can be completely removed, e.g. for
faster drying or to allow you to use other inserts.
1. Fold down the center panel in the rear seat
backrest.
2. Pull the handle, arrow 1.
3. Pull out the insert, arrow 2.
For more information on the various
inserts available, contact your BMW cen-
ter.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Driving tips
This section provides you with information
useful in dealing with specific driving and
operating conditions.
Driving tips
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving
120
Things to remember when driving
Break-in period
Moving parts need breaking-in time to adjust to
each other. Please follow the instructions below
in order to achieve the optimal service life and
economy of operation for your vehicle.
Engine and differential
Always obey all official speed limits.
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Drive at varying engine and road speeds, but do
not exceed an engine speed of 4500 rpm or a
road speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.
Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the
transmission's kick-down mode.
After driving 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Engine and vehicle speeds can be gradually
increased.
Tires
Due to technical factors associated with their
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac-
tion potential until after an initial break-in
period. Therefore, drive cautiously during the
first 200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brakes require an initial break-in period of
approx. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized
contact and wear patterns between brake pads
and rotors. Drive cautiously during this break-in
period.
Clutch
The function of the clutch reaches its optimal
level only after a distance driven of approx.
300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period,
engage the clutch gently.
Following part replacement
The same break-in procedures should be
observed if any of the components mentioned
above have to be renewed in the course of the
vehicle's operating life.
Saving fuel
The fuel consumption of your vehicle depends
on several factors. You can lower fuel consump-
tion and the environmental impact by taking
certain measures, adjusting your driving style
and having the vehicle serviced regularly.
Remove any unneeded cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Remove any mounted parts after you
have finished using them
Remove unneeded additional mirrors, the roof
rack and the rear luggage rack after use.
Mounted parts affect the vehicle's aerodynam-
ics and increase fuel consumption.
Close the windows and glass roof
An open glass roof or window causes higher air
resistance and thus increases fuel consump-
tion.
Check tire inflation pressure regularly
Check the tire inflation pressure at least twice a
month and before embarking on a long journey,
and correct it if necessary.
Low tire inflation pressure causes higher rolling
resistance and thus increases fuel consumption
and tire wear.
Set off immediately
Do not let the engine warm up while the car is
still standing, but set off immediately at moder-
ate engine speed. This is the fastest way for the
cold engine to reach its operating temperature.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Driving tips
121
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Drive defensively
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking
maneuvers. To do so, keep an adequate dis-
tance to the forward vehicle. A defensive and
smooth driving style keeps fuel consumption
down.
Avoid high engine speeds
Only use first gear when setting off. In second
and higher gears, accelerate without hesitation
or pauses. When accelerating, shift up before
reaching high engine speeds.
When you reach the desired speed, shift into
the highest applicable gear and drive with the
engine speed as low as possible and at a con-
stant speed.
As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers
fuel consumption and reduces wear.
Coasting
When approaching a red light, take your foot off
the accelerator and coast to a stop in the high-
est applicable gear.
On a downhill slope, take your foot off the accel-
erator and coast in a suitable gear.
The fuel supply is interrupted when coasting.
Switch off the engine during lengthy
stops
Switch off the engine when stopping for lengthy
periods, e.g. at traffic lights, railroad crossings
or in traffic congestions. You achieve fuel sav-
ings even if standing time is as short as approx.
4 seconds.
Switch off functions you do not need at
the moment
Functions such as the air conditioner and the
seat or rear window heating draw large amounts
of power and consume additional fuel. Espe-
cially in city traffic and in stop and go driving
they have a considerable impact. Therefore,
switch these functions off when they are not
really needed.
Have the vehicle serviced
Have the vehicle serviced regularly to achieve
good economy and a long vehicle life. BMW
recommends having the vehicle serviced at a
BMW center. Also note the BMW service sys-
tem, refer to page 226.
General driving notes
Close the luggage compartment lid/
tailgate
Operate the vehicle only when the lug-
gage compartment lid/tailgate and rear
window are closed. Otherwise, exhaust fumes
could enter the interior of the vehicle.<
If the vehicle must be driven with the luggage
compartment lid/tailgate open:
1. Close all windows and the glass roof.
2. Greatly increase the air volume of the auto-
matic climate control system, refer to
page 102.
Hot exhaust system
In all vehicles, extremely high tempera-
tures are generated in the exhaust sys-
tem. Do not remove the heat shields installed
adjacent to various sections of the exhaust sys-
tem, and never apply undercoating to them.
When driving, standing at idle and while park-
ing, take care to avoid possible contact
between the hot exhaust system and any highly
flammable materials such as hay, leaves, grass,
etc. Such contact could lead to a fire, with the
risk of serious personal injuries and property
damage. Do not touch hot exhaust tail pipes.
Otherwise there is a risk of burns.<
Hydroplaning
When driving on wet or slushy roads,
reduce road speed. If you do not, a wedge
of water can form between tires and road sur-
face. This situation, known as hydroplaning,
means that the tire can completely lose contact
with the road surface, so that neither the car can
be steered nor the brake be properly applied.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving
122
The risk of hydroplaning increases with declin-
ing tread depth on the tires, refer also to Mini-
mum tread depth on page 218.
Driving through water
Drive through water on the road only if it is
not deeper than 1 ft/30 cm, and then only
at walking speed at the most. Otherwise, the
vehicle's engine, the electrical systems and the
transmission may be damaged.<
Use the parking brake on inclines
On inclines, do not hold the vehicle for a
lengthy period using the clutch; use the
parking brake instead. Otherwise greater clutch
wear will result.<
For more information about the drive-off assis-
tant, refer to page 88.
Braking safely
Your BMW is equipped with ABS as a standard
feature. Applying the brakes fully is the most
effective way of braking in situations in which
this is necessary. Since the vehicle maintains
steering responsiveness, you can still avoid
possible obstacles with a minimum of steering
effort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal, combined with
sounds from the hydraulic circuits, indicate that
ABS is in its active mode.
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet or there is heavy rain,
briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal
every few miles. Monitor traffic conditions to
ensure that this maneuver does not endanger
other road users. The heat generated in this
process helps dry the pads and rotors to ensure
that full braking efficiency will then be available
when you need it.
Hills
To prevent overheating and the resulting
reduced efficiency of the brake system,
drive long or steep downhill gradients in the
gear in which the least braking is required. Even
light but consistent brake pressure can lead to
high temperatures, brake wear and possibly
even brake failure.<
You can increase the engine's braking effect by
shifting down, all the way to first gear if neces-
sary. This strategy helps you avoid placing
excessive loads on the brake system. Down-
shifting in manual mode of the automatic trans-
mission, refer to page 59.
Never drive with the clutch held down,
with the transmission in idle or with the
engine switched off; otherwise, engine braking
action will not be present or there will be no
power assistance to the brakes or steering.
Never allow floor mats, carpets or any other
objects to protrude into the area around the
pedals, otherwise pedal function could be
impaired.<
Corrosion on brake rotors
When the vehicle is driven only occasionally,
during extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all, and in operating conditions where
brake applications are less frequent, there is an
increased tendency for corrosion to form on
rotors, while contaminants accumulate on the
brake pads. This occurs because the minimum
pressure which must be exerted by the pads
during brake applications to clean the rotors is
not reached.
Should corrosion form on the brake rotors, the
brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating
effect that even extended application will fail to
cure.
When the vehicle is parked
Condensation forms while the automatic cli-
mate control is in operation, and then exits
under the vehicle. Traces of condensed water
under the vehicle are therefore normal.
Before driving into a car wash
For general information about taking care of
your BMW, refer to the Caring for your vehicle
brochure.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Driving tips
123
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Sports Wagon: rear window wiper
Driving through an automatic car wash can
result in damage to the rear window wiper. If
necessary, ask the operator of the car wash
about protective measures you should take.
With convenient access and automatic
transmission
Insert the remote control into the ignition
switch.
The engine can be switched off when the selec-
tor lever is in position N. Refer also to page 37.
Cargo loading
To avoid loading the tires beyond their
approved carrying capacity, never over-
load the vehicle. Overloading can lead to over-
heating and increases the rate at which damage
develops inside the tires. This can ultimately
result in a sudden blow-out.<
Make sure that no liquids are spilled or
leak from their containers in the cargo
bay, as this could result in damage to the vehi-
cle.<
Determining loading limit
1. Locate the following statement on your
vehicle's placard
*
:
The combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or YYY lbs. Otherwise, overloading
can result in damage to the vehicle and
unstable driving conditions.<
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY
pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the YYY amount equals
1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150-lb. pas-
sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail-
able cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs:
1,400 lbs. minus 750 lbs. = 650 lbs.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
in step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, part of
the load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult the manual for
transporting a trailer to determine how this
may reduce the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
Load
The permissible load is the total of the weight of
occupants and cargo/luggage. The greater the
weight of the occupants, the less cargo/lug-
gage can be transported.
Stowing cargo
> Position heavy objects as low and as far for-
ward as possible, ideally directly behind the
respective seat backrests.
> Cover sharp edges and corners.
> For very heavy cargo when the rear seat is
not occupied, secure each safety belt in the
opposite buckle.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving
124
Sedan
Sports Wagon
> Use the partition net to protect passengers,
refer to page 114. Make sure that objects
cannot penetrate the partition net.
> Do not stack cargo higher than the upper
edge of the backrests.
> Place protective material around any
objects which could bump against the rear
window while the vehicle is in motion.
Securing cargo
> Secure smaller and lighter items using
retaining straps, a cargo bay net
*
or draw
straps
*
.
> Heavy-duty cargo straps
*
for securing
larger and heavier objects are available at
your BMW center. Four lashing eyes are
provided for attaching the cargo straps.
Two are located on the cargo bay
sidewalls 1, two more are on the rear cargo
bay panel 2.
Please comply with the information sup-
plied with the cargo straps.
Always position and secure the cargo as
described above, so that it cannot endan-
ger the car's occupants, for example if sudden
braking or swerving is necessary.
Never exceed either the approved gross vehicle
weight or either of the approved axle loads, refer
to page 245, as excessive loads can pose a
safety hazard, and may also place you in viola-
tion of traffic safety laws.
Heavy or hard objects should not be carried
loose inside the car, since they could be thrown
around, for example as a result of heavy braking,
sudden swerves, etc., and endanger the occu-
pants.<
Roof-mounted luggage rack*
A special rack system is available as an option
for your BMW. Comply with the directions given
in the installation instructions.
Mounting points
The mounting points are located in the roof/
along the roof rails
*
.
Loading roof-mounted luggage rack
Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of
gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on
vehicle handling and steering response.
You should therefore always remember not to
exceed the approved roof load capacity, the
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Driving tips
125
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
approved gross vehicle weight or the axle loads
when loading the rack.
You can find the applicable data under Weights
on page 245.
The roof load must be distributed uniformly and
should not be too large in area. Heavy items
should always be placed at the bottom. Be sure
that adequate clearance is maintained for rais-
ing the glass roof, and that objects do not
project into the opening path of the luggage
compartment lid/tailgate.
Fasten roof-mounted cargo correctly and
securely to prevent it from shifting or falling off
during the trip.
Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration and
braking maneuvers. Take corners gently.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Navigation
This chapter describes how you can
enter destinations and specify your route
so that your navigation system guides you
reliably to your destination.
Navigation
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Starting the navigation system
128
Starting the navigation system
Your navigation system can use satellites to
ascertain the precise position of your vehicle
and guide you reliably to any destination you
enter.
Navigation DVD
The navigation system requires a special navi-
gation DVD. You can obtain the latest version at
your BMW center.
Inserting navigation DVD
Use the lower drive for navigation DVDs.
1. Insert the navigation DVD with the labeled
side up.
The navigation DVD is pulled in automati-
cally.
2. Wait for several seconds to allow the con-
tents of the DVD to be read in.
Removing navigation DVD
1. Press button 1.
The DVD emerges slightly from the drive.
2. Remove the DVD.
If the DVD is not ejected, the drive may be
blocked. In this case, a message will appear on
the Control Display.
Display in the assistance
window
You can display the route or the current position
in the assistance window. This display remains
visible even if you change to another applica-
tion.
1. Move the controller to the right to enter the
assistance window.
2. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
3. Select the desired route view or "Current
position".
4. Press the controller.
Displaying arrow display in map view*
When the navigation system suggests a change
in direction, the arrow display appears briefly.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
129
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
4. Turn the controller until "Language / Units"
is selected and press the controller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Languages" is selected and press the
controller.
6. Select "Arrow display pop-up instructions"
and press the controller.
The arrow view is displayed in the assis-
tance window.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Destination entry
130
Destination entry
In entering your destination you can select from
the following options:
> Entering a destination manually, see below
> Entering a destination by voice com-
mands*, refer to page 134
> Selecting destination using information,
refer to page 136
> Selecting destination from a list, refer to
Destination list, page 137
> Selecting destination from address book,
refer to page 138
> Selecting home address, refer to page 140
After selecting your destination you can pro-
ceed to start the destination guidance, refer to
page 143.
You can also store a navigation destination on
the programmable memory keys, refer to
page 21.
Enter data only when the vehicle is sta-
tionary, and always give priority to the
applicable traffic regulations in the event of any
contradiction between traffic and road condi-
tions and the instructions issued by the naviga-
tion system. Otherwise, vehicle occupants and
other road users may be endangered.<
Opening navigation
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the right to call up
"Navigation".
3. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
The following is displayed on the Control Dis-
play:
> The arrow or map view during destination
guidance
> The destination list when destination guid-
ance is switched off
Entering a destination
manually
The system's word-matching principle makes it
easier for you to enter the names of streets or
towns, refer to page 142. This allows you to
enter different spellings and completes your
entry automatically so that stored names can be
called up quickly.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
131
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
1. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Navigation" is selected and press the
controller.
"New destination" is selected.
2. Press the controller.
3. Select "Enter address" and press the con-
troller.
The system also supports you with the follow-
ing features:
> If you do not enter a street, the system will
guide you to the downtown area of a town or
city.
> You can skip the entry of country and local-
ity if the current entries should be retained
for your new destination.
Selecting country
1. Select "State / Province" or the country dis-
played and press the controller.
The list of available countries appears on
the display.
2. Select the country of destination and press
the controller.
At least the town/city of the destination or its zip
code must be entered in order to start the des-
tination guidance.
Entering destination by town/city name
1. Select "Town / City" or the town/city dis-
played and press the controller.
2. Select the starting letter and press the con-
troller.
A list of all towns/cities starting with this let-
ter appears on the Control Display.
3. Delete letters, if necessary:
> To delete individual numbers or letters:
Move the controller towards the right to
select , and press the controller.
> To delete all numbers or letters:
Move the controller toward the right to
select , and press the controller for
a longer period.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Destination entry
132
4. If necessary, enter more letters.
The list gradually grows smaller each time
you enter a new letter.
> To enter spaces, if necessary:
Select the symbol and press the con-
troller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the third field from the top. Turn the control-
ler until the city or town name is selected
from the list and press the controller.
Entering destination by zip code
1. Select "Town / City" and press the control-
ler.
2. Enter the zip code:
Select the desired digits and press the con-
troller.
> To enter spaces:
Select the symbol and press the con-
troller.
> To delete individual numbers or letters:
Move the controller towards the right to
select , and press the controller.
> To delete all numbers or letters:
Move the controller toward the right to
select , and press the controller for
a longer period.
3. Select the zip code and press the controller.
The corresponding destination is displayed.
4. Move the highlight marker to the third field
from the top. Turn the controller until the
destination is selected and press the con-
troller.
Entering street, house number and
intersection
After the street you can also enter the intersec-
tion or the house number.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
133
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Entering street and intersection
1. Select "Street" or the street displayed and
press the controller.
2. Enter the street.
The street is entered in the same manner as
the town or city.
The intersection is entered in the same way as
the street.
Entering a street without entering a
town/city
You can also enter a street without specifying a
town/city. In this case, all streets of the same
name in the designated country are offered.
The corresponding town/city is displayed after
the street name.
If a town/city has already been entered, you can
negate this entry. This could be helpful in
instances where the desired street does not
exist in the entered town/city because it
belongs to another suburb, for example.
1. Move the highlight marker to the uppermost
field.
The arrow is selected.
2. Turn the controller to the right until you see
a request to enter a street in the country,
then press the controller.
3. Switch to the second field from the top and
enter the street.
Entering a house number
You can enter any house number stored for the
street on the navigation DVD.
1. Select "House number" and press the con-
troller.
2. To enter the house number:
Select the desired digits and press the con-
troller.
3. Move the highlight marker to the third field
from the top. Turn the controller until the
house number is selected and press the
controller.
Starting destination guidance with
manual destination entry
> Select "Start guidance" and press the con-
troller.
Destination guidance starts immediately.
> If you do not want to start destination guid-
ance right away:
Select "Add to destination list" and press
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Destination entry
134
the controller.
The destination is stored in the destination
list, refer to page 137.
Entering a destination by
voice commands*
You can enter a desired destination via the
voice command system. During the destination
input, you can switch between voice entry and
entry via iDrive at any time. To do so, reactivate
the voice command system if necessary.
You can have the possible commands
read aloud via {Options}.<
1. Press the button on the steering wheel
or in the center console.
Selecting country
1. Wait for the system to ask for the country of
destination.
Say the name of the destination country in the
language of the voice command system.
Entering a destination
The destination can be spelled or entered as an
entire word.
Spelling the destination
To enter a destination, spell it in the way it is
commonly spelled in the destination country.
Pronounce the letters smoothly and at normal
volume, avoiding excessive emphases and
pauses.
The system can suggest up to 20 destina-
tions that meet your entries. Up to 6 entries
at a time appear on the Control Display.
The town/city can also be selected from the list
via iDrive:
Turn the controller until the destination is
selected and press the controller.
Entering the destination as an entire
word*
The names of towns/cities and streets located
in the region in which the language of the voice
command system is spoken can be entered as
an entire word.
Example: to enter a U.S. destination as an entire
word, the system language must be English.
Speak smoothly and at normal volume, and
avoid excessive emphases and pauses.
2. {Enter address}
2. Say the name of the destination coun-
try.
1. To spell the name of a town/city:
Say at least the first three letters of the
town/city. The more letters you say, the
more accurately the system will recog-
nize the town/city.
The system suggests a location.
2. Select location:
> To select highlighted town/city:
{Yes}
> To select other town/city: {No}
> To select an entry, e.g. {Entry 3}
> To show other entries in the list:
{Next page}
> To respell the town/city: {Repeat}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
135
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
1. Wait for the system to ask for the town/city
of destination.
The system can suggest up to 6 destina-
tions that fit your entries.
The town/city can also be selected from the list
via iDrive:
Turn the controller until the destination is
selected and press the controller.
Identical-sounding towns/cities that can-
not be distinguished by the system are
compiled in a separate list and shown as a des-
tination followed by three dots.
If applicable, select this entry with {Yes}. Then
select the desired town/city from that list.<
Entering street and house number
The street is entered in the same way as the
destination town/city.
To enter the house number:
House numbers of up to 4 digits can be entered.
Say the house number as individual digits.
Starting destination guidance
Destination guidance starts immediately.
Storing destinations
Destinations are added to the destination list or
can be stored in the address book.
Map-guided destination
selection
If you only know the location of the town or
street of destination, you can enter the destina-
tion using a map. You can use the cross-hairs to
select the destination on the map and then
transfer it for destination guidance.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
"New destination" is selected.
2. Press the controller.
3. Select "Input map" and press the controller.
2. Say the name of the destination town/
city.
The system suggests a location.
3. Select location:
> To select highlighted town/city:
{Yes}
> To select other town/city: {No}
> To select an entry, e.g. {Entry 3}
> To re-enter the town/city: {Repeat}
> To enter the town/city by spelling:
{Spell}
1. {House number}
2. Say the house number.
{Start guidance}
{Add to destination list} or
{Add to address book}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Destination entry
136
A section of a map is displayed on the Con-
trol Display:
> During destination guidance, around the
current destination
> With the destination guidance deacti-
vated, around the last destination
entered
4. Select the destination with the cross-hairs.
> To change the scale: turn the controller.
> To move the map: move the controller in
the desired direction.
The controller can be moved to the left,
right, forwards and backwards.
5. Press the controller to transfer the destina-
tion for destination guidance or to store it.
The selected destination and other menu
items are displayed.
6. Select the desired menu item:
> "Start route guidance" starts destination
guidance.
> "Show current position" places your
current position at the center of the map.
> "Show destination position" places the
current destination at the center of the
map.
> "Return to map" changes back to the
"Input map".
> Exit the menu.
7. Press the controller.
The map for destination entry can also be called
up in the map display:
Select the symbol and press the controller.
Selecting destination using
information
You can have a list of selected destinations dis-
played, e.g. hotels, sights or hospitals, and
transfer them for destination guidance.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Select "Information" and press the control-
ler.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
137
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
3. Select location:
> "On destination"
> "On location"
> "On a new destination"
4. Press the controller.
5. Make your selection, e.g. "Hotels and res-
taurants", and press the controller.
6. Enter search criteria if necessary, e.g. the
maximum distance from your location.
7. Select "<Start search>" and press the con-
troller.
Destinations are shown on the Control Dis-
play.
8. Select a destination and press the control-
ler.
The scope of information and sym-
bols depends on the particular navi-
gation DVD you are using.<
9. Select the desired menu item:
> To transfer the address to the destina-
tion list and start destination guidance:
Select the symbol and press the
controller.
> To establish a telephone connection:
Select the symbol and press the con-
troller.
> To display additional destinations:
Select the symbol and press the
controller.
> To start a new search:
Select the symbol and press the con-
troller.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Symbols in the map display
If you select the hotel category, for example,
and start a search, hotels appear on the map as
symbols.
To hide the symbols in the map display:
1. Select the symbol and press the control-
ler.
2. Select "Hide map icons" and press the con-
troller.
The symbols are hidden.
To show the symbols:
Select "Show map icons" and press the con-
troller.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Destination list
The last 20 destinations entered into the sys-
tem are shown in the destination list. You can
call up these destinations and transfer them for
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Destination entry
138
destination guidance.
If you are planning a longer journey, for exam-
ple, you can store all the destinations you wish
to drive to in the destination list in advance,
refer to Entering a destination manually on
page 130.
Select "Navigation" and press the controller.
The destination last entered is listed first in the
destination list.
This symbol identifies the current destina-
tion during destination guidance.
To show other destinations in the destination
list:
Turn the controller.
Transferring destination for
destination guidance
1. Select the desired destination from the des-
tination list and press the controller.
2. Select "Start guidance" and press the con-
troller.
Editing destination list
1. Select the desired destination from the des-
tination list and press the controller.
2. The selected destination can be edited:
> To store the entry:
Select "Add to address book".
> To display information on the destina-
tion:
Select "Information on destination".
> To delete the entry:
Select "Delete entry".
> To delete all entries:
Select "Delete list". The destination
guidance is switched off.
> To change an entry:
Select "Edit". For operation, refer to
Entering destination by town/city name,
page 131.
3. Press the controller.
Address book
Opening address book
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
Select "Address book" and press the controller.
Storing destinations in address book
You can store approx. 100 destinations in the
address book.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
139
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller.
2. Select "New address" and press the con-
troller.
3. Select "Enter address" and press the con-
troller.
4. Enter the name and address, refer also to
Entering a destination manually, page 130.
5. Select "Store in address book" and press
the controller.
The entry is stored in the address book.
You can also store a destination from the desti-
nation list in the address book, refer to
page 137.
Storing current position*
The current position can be transferred to the
address book.
1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller.
2. Move the highlight marker to the third field
from the top. Turn the controller until "New
address" is selected and press the control-
ler.
3. Select "Use current location as address"
and press the controller.
The name given can be changed. For oper-
ation, refer to Entering a destination manu-
ally, page 130.
4. Select "Store in address book" and press
the controller.
You can also enter your current position into the
address book if you have left the area covered
by the navigation DVD. In this case, you must
enter a name.
Selecting destinations from address
book
1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller.
The stored entries appear on the Control
Display.
2. Select the entry and press the controller.
To start destination guidance:
Select "Start guidance" and press the control-
ler.
Changing destinations from address
book
1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller.
2. Select the entry and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Destination entry
140
3. Select "Edit address" and press the con-
troller.
4. Change entry.
For operation, refer to Entering a destina-
tion manually, page 130.
5. Select "Store in address book" and press
the controller.
Deleting individual destinations from
address book
1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller.
2. Select the entry and press the controller.
3. Select "Delete address" and press the con-
troller.
Deleting all destinations from address
book
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con-
troller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Delete data" is selected and press the
controller.
6. Select "Delete address book" and press the
controller.
7. Select "Yes" and press the controller.
Home address
You can store your current position or the cur-
rent destination as the home address in the
address book. This entry occupies the second
position in the address book.
Storing home address
1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
troller.
2. Move the highlight marker to the third field
from the top. Turn the controller until
"Home address" is selected and press the
controller.
3. Select "Use current location as address" or
"Save current destination" during destina-
tion guidance and press the controller.
4. Select "Store in address book" and press
the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
141
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Using home address as destination
1. Select "Home address" and press the con-
troller.
2. Select "Start guidance" and press the con-
troller.
Changing home address
1. Select "Home address" and press the con-
troller.
2. Select "Edit address" and press the con-
troller. For operation, refer to Entering a
destination manually, page 130.
Route selection
You can influence the calculated route by
choosing certain route criteria. You can change
the route criteria as often as you like during des-
tination entry or during destination guidance.
The route is planned according to fixed rules.
The type of road is taken into account, e.g.
whether it is a highway or a winding road. The
road types are stored on the navigation DVD. As
a result, the routes recommended by the navi-
gation system may not always be the same
ones that you would choose based on personal
experience.
Changing route criteria
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Move the highlight marker to the third field
from the top. Turn the controller until
"Route preference" is selected and press
the controller.
The various criteria are shown on the Con-
trol Display.
3. Select a route criterion for the route:
> "With highways"
Highways and major traffic arteries are
given priority.
> "Avoid highways"
Highways are avoided as far as possible.
> "Fast route"
Fast route, being a combination of the
shortest possible route and the fastest
roads
> "Short route"
Short route, irrespective of how fast or
slow progress will be
4. Press the controller.
The route criterion is selected.
5. If necessary, select an additional route cri-
terion and then press the controller:
> "Dynamic route"
Automatic rerouting due to traffic
obstructions. Depending on road type
and the kind and extent of the traffic
obstruction, the guided route may lead
through the traffic obstruction.
> "Avoid tollroads"
Toll roads are avoided as far as possible.
> "Avoid ferries"
Ferries are avoided as far as possible.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
The route criteria can also be changed in the
arrow or map display.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Destination entry
142
1. Select the symbol for the route criterion and
press the controller.
2. Select a route criterion and press the con-
troller.
If the "Avoid highways", "Avoid tollroads"
or "Avoid ferries" route criteria are
selected, route calculation may take consider-
ably longer.<
Word-matching principle
The system's word-matching principle makes it
easier for you to enter the names of towns or
streets. The system runs ongoing checks, com-
paring your destination entries with the data
stored on the navigation DVD as the basis for
instant response. The benefits for you include:
> Names of towns entered may differ from the
official versions if you are using a spelling
that is customary in another country.
Example:
Instead of the German spelling "München"
you can also enter the English spelling
"Munich" or the Italian spelling "Monaco".
> When you are entering the names of towns
and streets the system will complete them
automatically as soon as enough letters are
available to ensure unambiguous identifica-
tion.
> The system offers only those letters for
selection of name entries that are stored on
the navigation DVD. Thus, entry of errone-
ous or unregistered names is impossible.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
143
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Destination guidance
Starting destination
guidance
Via iDrive
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Navigation" is selected and press the
controller.
2. Select the destination from the destination
list and press the controller or enter a new
destination, refer to page 130.
3. Select "Start guidance" and press the con-
troller.
After the route has been calculated, destination
guidance is indicated by arrows or a map dis-
play on the Control Display.
Destination guidance can also be started in the
arrow or map display:
Select the symbol and press the controller.
During destination guidance, you can operate
other equipment items at any time via iDrive.
You will be notified in time of any necessary
change of direction by means of spoken
instructions and the display of the direction
arrows.
Via programmable memory keys
... Press the key on which the
desired destination has been stored, refer also
to page 21.
Terminating/continuing
destination guidance
In the arrow or map display
Select the symbol and press the controller.
In the destination list
This symbol indicates the current destina-
tion.
1. Select the current destination and press the
controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Destination guidance
144
2. Select "Stop guidance" and press the con-
troller.
If you did not reach the destination before the
end of the last journey, the following question
will appear in the display at the start of the next
journey:
"Continue guidance to destination?".
The destination guidance starts automatically
after a short time.
To start destination guidance immediately:
Select "Yes" and press the controller.
Route display
You can have the route during destination guid-
ance displayed in various ways.
From another menu, you can switch
directly to the screen last displayed, refer
to Convenient call-up of menu items on
page 18.<
Arrow display
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Move the highlight marker to the fourth field
from the top. Turn the controller until
"Arrow display" is selected and press the
controller.
The arrow display is shown.
1 Switching voice instructions on/off
2 Selecting route criteria
3 Starting/stopping destination guidance
4 Arrow to destination as the crow flies
5 Distance to the next change of direction
6 Current location
7 Direction of travel
> Outline of an arrow:
Destination guidance on the calculated
route
> Solid arrow:
Arrow points as the crow flies to the cal-
culated route whenever the vehicle is
not in an area recorded on the navigation
DVD, e.g. in a parking garage.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the
projected time of arrival and distance to the
destination is displayed in the top or bottom line
of the Control Display.
The arrows change appearance before a
change of direction.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
145
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
1 Street name for change of direction
2 Distance to change of direction
3 Change of direction
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Map display
You can have your current position displayed on
a map. After starting the destination guidance,
the planned route is shown on the map.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Move the highlight marker to the fourth field
from the top. Turn the controller until the
desired map display is selected:
> "Map facing north"
> "Map direction of travel"
> "Perspective"
3. Press the controller.
1 Switching voice instructions on/off
2 Starting/stopping destination guidance
3 Map-guided destination selection
4 Displaying the menu in which the informa-
tion last selected can be shown/hidden,
refer to Selecting destination using infor-
mation, page 136
5 Changing map display
> "Map facing north"
> "Map direction of travel"
> "Perspective"
6 Changing route criteria
7 Calling up traffic information
*
manually
8 Arrow to destination as the crow flies
The projected time of arrival and distance to the
destination is displayed in the bottom line of the
Control Display.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
At scales of less than 250 miles/500 km, you
can have the map shown facing north or toward
your current direction of travel, or in perspec-
tive. At scales of 250 miles/500 km or greater,
the map is always north-oriented.
Changing map display
Select the corresponding symbol and press the
controller.
The next map display is displayed.
Changing scale
Turn the controller to adjust the scale.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Destination guidance
146
Displaying towns/cities and streets
along the route
You can have the roads and towns along the
route displayed during destination guidance.
The distances remaining to be traveled within
each section of the route are also displayed.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Move the highlight marker to the third field
from the top. Turn the controller until
"Route list" is selected and press the con-
troller.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Destination guidance
through voice instructions
Switching voice instructions on/off
Voice instructions can be switched on or off
during the destination guidance in the arrow or
map display:
Select the symbol and press the controller.
To switch the voice instructions on/off at any
time:
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "Language / Units"
is selected and press the controller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Languages" is selected and press the
controller.
6. Select "Navigation voice instructions" and
press the controller.
The voice instructions are switched on.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
147
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Repeating or canceling voice
instructions
With the programmable buttons on the steering
wheel, you can also execute the following func-
tions, refer to page 50:
> Repeat the voice instruction:
Press the button.
> Switch voice instructions on/off:
Press the button for a longer period.
Adjusting volume for voice instructions
The volume can be adjusted only while a voice
instruction is being issued.
1. Have the last voice instruction repeated, if
necessary.
2. Turn the button during the voice instruction
to select the desired volume.
This volume is independent of the volume of the
audio sources.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Changing a route
During destination guidance, you can revise the
navigation system's route recommendations to
avoid particular stretches of road. Enter the
number of miles/kilometers that you want to
travel before returning to the original route.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Move the highlight marker to the third field
from the top. Turn the controller until "New
route" is selected and press the controller.
3. Turn the controller to enter the desired
number and press the controller.
The route is recalculated.
To exit from the menu without changing the
route:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Traffic information*
In many metropolitan areas you can receive
traffic information broadcast by radio stations.
The traffic conditions are monitored by traffic
control centers and the traffic information is
updated periodically.
During destination guidance, the traffic infor-
mation relevant to the route you are planning to
take is automatically shown and taken into
account in route planning. Whether destination
guidance is active or not, you can have the traf-
fic information displayed in the map view or in
the traffic info list.
Switching reception of traffic
information on/off
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Destination guidance
148
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "Traffic Info set-
tings" is selected and press the controller.
5. Select "Traffic Info" and press the control-
ler.
The traffic information can be received and
displayed.
"AUTO": automatic selection of the Traffic Info
station with the best reception.
Depending on the station, either the sta-
tion name, frequency, local number or
other information is displayed.<
Calling up traffic information manually
During destination guidance
During destination guidance, traffic information
can be displayed in the arrow or map view.
If the symbol is shown with a red border, traf-
fic information is available for the planned route.
Select the symbol and press the controller.
During destination guidance, traffic information
items along the planned route are indicated by
yellow diamonds.
Traffic information on the planned route is
shown first, sorted by distance from the vehi-
cle's current position.
With destination guidance switched off
1. Open the start menu.
2. Move the controller to the right to call up
"Navigation".
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
149
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
3. Select "Traffic Info" and press the control-
ler.
Traffic information on the planned route is
shown first, sorted by distance from the vehi-
cle's current position.
Displaying traffic information in map
display
The traffic information icons are shown in the
map display up to a scale of 100 miles/200 km.
The highlighting of the stretch corresponding
to the traffic report and the icons for the type of
event as described below are displayed and
hidden. This depends on the selected scale.
Displaying detailed traffic information
Select a traffic information item from the list and
press the controller.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Destination guidance
150
Traffic information icons
Traffic information during destination
guidance
System response will vary depending on
whether or not "Dynamic route" is selected,
refer to page 141.
Displaying traffic obstructions
When the navigation system receives a traffic
obstruction message and "Dynamic route" is
not selected, you are shown certain informa-
tion, such as the length of the traffic congestion,
when you are approx. 25 miles/40 km away
from the traffic obstruction.
The last possible detour exit is indicated just
before you reach it.
Traffic event displayed with map
scales larger than 5 miles/10 km;
arrow points in relevant direction of
travel
There are several traffic events.
Switch to a smaller map scale to
show more detail.
Traffic light failure
Roadworks
General traffic obstruction
Transport of hazardous load
Vehicle on wrong carriageway
Danger
Low clearance
No parking
Fog
Heavy rain
Slippery road
Cross winds
Smog
Road closed
Slow traffic
Traffic backup
Stopped traffic
Icy roads
Uneven surface
Accident
Lane closure
Delay
Police checkpoint
Slow traffic or other traffic event
Stop and go traffic
Stopped traffic
Traffic events in both directions of
travel
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
151
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
This information is displayed even if you have
called up another application on the Control
Display.
Dynamic route planning
When "Dynamic route" is selected, the route
will be changed automatically in the event of a
traffic obstruction. The system does not point
out traffic obstructions on the original route.
Depending on road type and the kind and extent
of the traffic obstruction, the calculated route
may lead through the traffic obstruction.
Displaying current position
You can have your current position displayed
even when the destination guidance is
switched off.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
ler.
2. Move the highlight marker to the fourth field
from the top. Turn the controller until "Cur-
rent position" is selected and press the
controller.
The current position of your BMW is displayed.
If the navigation system is unable to identify a
town or city, your current map coordinates will
appear.
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
You can also have the current position dis-
played on a map, refer to page 145.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
What to do if …
152
What to do if …
What to do if …
> a navigation DVD is inserted, but an instruc-
tion to insert the DVD appears on the Con-
trol Display?
The navigation DVD may not be the correct
DVD for the navigation system. This infor-
mation is indicated on the DVD label.
> you request the current position of your
vehicle, but do not receive a precise dis-
play?
The system is unable to receive enough
GPS signals at your current position due to
obstructions, your current position is not
yet available on your navigation DVD, or the
system is in the process of calculating your
current position. As a rule, reception is
guaranteed when you are in the open.
> the destination guidance does not accept a
destination?
The data of the destination is not stored on
the navigation DVD that is loaded. Choose a
destination as close as possible to the orig-
inal one.
> the destination guidance does not accept
an address without the street name?
On the navigation DVD, no downtown area
can be determined for the city or town
entered. Enter any street, or a destination
such as the railway station in the selected
town, and then start the destination guid-
ance.
> you want to enter a destination for the des-
tination guidance, but it is not possible to
select the letters for your desired entry?
The data of the destination is not stored on
the navigation DVD that is loaded. In this
case, the system will not offer you any let-
ters to choose from. Choose a destination
as close as possible to the original one.
> the system stops furnishing directions on
which way to turn as you approach intersec-
tions?
You are driving in an area that has not yet
been completely recorded on the naviga-
tion DVD. Instead of an arrow indicating a
turn, you will see an arrow which indicates
the general direction of your planned route.
Or you have left the recommended route
and the system requires a few seconds to
calculate a new recommended route.
> the navigation system does not react to
entries?
If the battery was disconnected, it takes
about 10 minutes before the system is once
again operational.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Entertainment
Operation of the radio, CD equipment and
external audio devices as well as their tone
settings are described in this chapter.
Entertainment
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
On/off and settings
156
On/off and settings
The following audio sources have shared con-
trols and setting options:
> Radio
> CD player
> CD changer
*
Controls
The audio sources can be operated using:
> Buttons near the CD player
> iDrive
> Buttons
on the steering wheel, refer to
page 11
> Programmable memory keys, refer to
page 21
Buttons on the CD player
1 Sound output for entertainment on/off, vol-
ume
> Press: switch on/off.
When you switch on the unit, the last set
radio station or track is played.
> Turn: adjust volume.
2 Drive for audio CDs
3 Eject CD.
4 Station scan/track search
> Change radio station.
> Select track for CD player and CD
changer.
5 Drive for navigation DVD
Operation via iDrive
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to call up
"Entertainment".
You have the following choices:
> "FM" and "AM": radio reception
> "SAT": satellite radio
*
> "CD": CD player or changer
> "AUX": AUX-In port, USB-audio interface
> "Set": depending on the audio source,
other adjustments can be made, e.g. with
the radio: update station with strongest
reception, store station, tone control, sam-
ple stations.
From another menu, you can switch
directly to the screen last displayed, refer
to Convenient call-up of menu items on
page 18.<
With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond,
the selected audio source is stored for the
remote control currently in use.
Switching on/off
In order to switch the entertainment sound out-
put on and off:
Press button 1 on the CD player.
This symbol on the Control Display indi-
cates that sound output is switched off.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
157
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Adjusting volume
Turn knob 1 on the CD player until the desired
volume is obtained.
You can also adjust the volume with buttons on
the steering wheel, refer to page 11.
With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond,
the setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Tone control
You can alter various tone settings, e.g. treble
and bass or the speed-dependent volume
increase.
The tone settings are applied to all audio
sources.
With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond,
the settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Changing tone settings
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Select "Audio" and press the controller.
The tone settings can also be selected if you
have called up "Entertainment" in the start
menu:
Select "Set" and then "Tone", pressing the
controller after each selection.
Treble and bass
1. Select "Treble / Bass" and press the con-
troller.
2. Move the controller to the left or right to
select "Treble" or "Bass".
3. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
Balance and fader
You can adjust the volume distribution in the
same manner as "Treble / Bass".
> "Balance": left/right volume distribution
> "Fader": front/rear volume distribution
Speed-dependent volume control
The speed-dependent volume control auto-
matically increases the volume with increasing
driving speed. You can set various stages for
the increase in volume.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
On/off and settings
158
1. Select "Speed volume" and press the con-
troller.
2. Turn the controller:
The adjustment is applied; the field can be
changed.
Professional LOGIC7 HiFi System*
You can select a spatial sound effect that
improves the spatial acoustics in all frequency
ranges.
1. Select "Surround Settings" and press the
controller.
2. Select "Concert hall" or "Theater".
3. Press the controller.
LOGIC7 spatial sound is switched on.
To switch off the spatial sound effect:
Select "Off" and press the controller.
LOGIC7 and the LOGIC7 logo are registered
trade marks of Lexicon, Inc., a company of the
Harman International Group.
Individual High-End Audio System*
You can choose between stereo and multichan-
nel playback, surround.
1. Select "Surround Settings" and press the
controller.
2. Select "Stereo" or "Surround".
Equalizer*
You can set individual sound frequency ranges.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
159
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
1. Select "Equalizer" and press the controller.
2. Move the controller to the left or right to
select the desired frequency range.
3. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
Resetting tone settings
You can reset all tone settings to the default
setting.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Select "Audio" and press the controller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Reset" is selected and press the con-
troller.
6. In vehicles equipped with two drives:
Select "Yes" and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Radio
160
Radio
Your radio provides reception of the FM and AM
wavebands.
Listening to the radio
Press the button if the sound output is switched
off.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to call up
"Entertainment".
3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Select "FM" or "AM".
4. Press the controller.
Stations are shown on the Control Display on
the basis of various selection criteria, e.g. "Pre-
sets".
If "Autostore" does not show a station in the AM
waveband or if the displayed stations are no
longer receivable, update the stations with the
best reception, refer to page 161.
Changing stations
Turn the controller.
Buttons on the CD player
Press the button for the corre-
sponding direction.
The system switches to the next displayed sta-
tion.
You can also change the station with the but-
tons on the steering wheel, refer to page 11.
Changing selection criteria
In addition to the stations currently displayed,
you can have stations with another selection
criterion displayed.
You can choose from the following selection
criteria:
> "All stations"
*
:
Stations that can currently be received on
the "FM" waveband.
> "Autostore":
Stations with the best reception on the
"AM" waveband.
For High Definition Radio: stations with the
best reception on the "FM" waveband.
> "Presets":
Stations you have previously stored, refer to
page 162.
> "Manual":
To set stations that can be received in addi-
tion to those already being displayed, refer
to Selecting the frequency manually,
page 161.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
161
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
To change the selection criterion:
1. Move the highlight marker to the second
field from the top.
2. Choose a selection criterion and press the
controller.
Sampling stations, Scan
The stations on the current waveband are auto-
matically sampled in succession.
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-
ler.
"Set" is selected.
2. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
3. Select "Scan" and press the controller.
The stations are sampled.
Stop sampling:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.
Station sampling is interrupted and the
selected station stays on.
Buttons on the CD player
To sample stations, press the but-
ton for the corresponding direction for an
extended time.
To stop scanning, press the button again.
Selecting the frequency manually
With "Manual" you can select stations that can
be received in addition to those displayed.
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-
ler.
2. Move the highlight marker to the second
field from the top.
3. Select "Manual" and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller to set a certain fre-
quency.
Updating stations with best reception
If on a longer journey you move out of the
reception range of the stations originally
received, you can update the list of stations
received with the strongest signals in the AM
waveband.
1. Select "AM" and press the controller.
2. Move the highlight marker to the second
field from the top.
3. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.
"Set" is selected.
4. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Radio
162
5. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.
The display of the stations with the strongest
reception is updated. The frequencies of the
stations are displayed.
Storing stations
Via iDrive
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-
ler.
2. Move the highlight marker to the second
field from the top. Turn the controller until
the desired selection criterion is chosen
and press the controller.
3. Select the desired frequency or station.
"Set" is selected.
4. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
5. Select "Store" and press the controller.
"Presets" is displayed.
6. Turn the controller until the desired mem-
ory location is selected.
7. Press the controller.
The station is stored.
The channels of the last selection criterion are
displayed once again after a short time.
With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond,
the stations are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Via programmable memory keys
You can store a station on the programmable
memory keys, refer also to page 21.
1. Select a station.
2. ... Press the desired key for a
longer period.
Changing a memory position
1. Select "Presets" and press the controller.
2. Select the desired station.
"Set" is selected.
3. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
163
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
4. Select "Store" and press the controller.
5. Turn the controller until the desired mem-
ory location is selected.
The number of the memory location
appears beside the name or frequency of
the station.
6. Press the controller.
The station is stored.
RDS Radio Data System
On the FM waveband, additional information is
broadcast via RDS. If the reception conditions
are good, the station names are shown on the
Control Display. Where reception is poor or in
the event of interference, it may take some time
before the station names will appear in the dis-
play.
Switching RDS on/off*
1. Select "FM" and press the controller.
"Set" is selected.
2. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
3. Select "RDS" and press the controller.
RDS is activated.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
High Definition Radio*
Many stations transmit analog and digital sig-
nals. You can receive these stations digitally for
improved sound quality.
A digital radio network must be available to be
able to receive digital stations.
Switching digital radio reception on/off
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Select "Audio" and press the controller.
5. Move the highlight marker to the uppermost
field. Turn the controller until "HD radio" is
selected and press the controller.
6. Select "Off" and press the controller.
Digital station reception is now switched on.
This symbol is displayed when a station is
received digitally.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Radio
164
Some stations do not transmit the digital and
analog signals simultaneously. If you are in an
area in which digital reception of the selected
station is not possible continuously, reception
will alternate between analog and digital. This
can cause repetitions or interruptions. In this
case it may be preferable to switch off digital
reception.
Selecting the programs of a digital
station*
Some stations broadcast several programs on a
single frequency. To select one of these pro-
grams:
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-
ler.
2. Select "Manual" and press the controller.
3. Select a station that can be received digi-
tally.
This symbol is displayed when a station
is received digitally.
4. Change to the next program of
the digital station using the buttons on the
radio or steering wheel.
You can store a station, refer to page 162.
Updating digitally receivable stations
If on a longer journey you move out of the
reception range of the stations originally
received, you can update the list of stations
received with the strongest signals.
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-
ler.
2. Move the highlight marker to the second
field from the top.
3. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.
4. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
5. Select "Autostore " and press the con-
troller.
The display of the digitally receivable stations is
updated. This can take up to 2 minutes.
Displaying additional information
With digital stations, additional information on
the current track can be displayed, e.g. the
name of the artist.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
165
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
1. Select the station and press the controller.
2. Select "Details" and press the controller.
The information is displayed.
When you change to another digitally received
station, any additional information is displayed
after a brief interruption.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Satellite radio
166
Satellite radio
You can receive over 100 different channels
with high sound quality.
The channels are offered to you in predefined
packages. To receive the channels of your
choice, you must have the corresponding pack-
ages enabled.
With this new technology, signal losses
can occur from time to time and result in
audio interruptions.<
Enabling or disabling
channels
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to call up
"Entertainment".
3. Select "SAT".
4. Press the controller.
The channels are displayed.
These channels are enabled.
Enabling
1. Select a channel that has not yet been
enabled and press the controller.
A telephone number and the electronic
serial number, ESN, are displayed.
The electronic serial number is
required to enable or disable.<
2. To enable the channel:
Dial the phone number.
Disabling
1. Select an enabled channel and press the
controller.
2. Select "ESN" and press the controller.
The electronic serial number, ESN, is dis-
played.
The electronic serial number is
required to disable.<
3. To disable the channel:
Dial the phone number.
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
167
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Selecting and storing a
channel
1. Select "SAT" and press the controller.
Channels and categories are displayed on
the Control Display.
2. Select a menu item:
> "Presets":
Up to twelve channels you stored previ-
ously.
> "All channels":
All channels are displayed.
> "Categories":
All channels, sorted by category, e.g.
news, jazz.
3. Press the controller.
4. If "Categories" has been selected:
Select the desired category and press the
controller.
The channels of this category are displayed.
5. Select a channel marked with this sym-
bol.
6. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
7. Select "Play" and press the controller.
Additional information
The name of the channel and additional infor-
mation on the current track are displayed, e.g.
the name of the artist.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Satellite radio
168
1 Artist
2 Track
Storing a channel
1. Select the desired channel.
2. Press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
3. Select "Store" and press the controller.
"Presets" is displayed.
4. Turn the controller to select a memory loca-
tion and press the controller.
The channel is stored. The channels of the last
selection criterion are displayed again after a
short time.
Changing channels with buttons on CD
player
Press the button for the corre-
sponding direction.
The system switches to the next enabled chan-
nel.
Notes
When more than 4 seconds go by and no signal
is received, a message appears on the Control
Display.
Under some circumstances, e.g. depend-
ing on environmental or topographic con-
ditions, it may not be possible to receive any
signal. The satellite radio cannot influence this.
A signal may not be available in tunnels or
underground garages, next to high-rise build-
ings, in the vicinity of trees, mountains or other
strong sources of radio interference.
Reception usually resumes as soon as the sig-
nal becomes available again.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
169
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
CD player and CD changer
Listening to CDs
Compressed audio files*
CDs with compressed audio files, MP3s, can be
played by the CD player and CD changer.
Starting the CD player
The upper drive is for audio CDs.
Insert the CD into the drive with the labeled side
up.
The CD is pulled in automatically. Playback
starts automatically if the sound output is on.
When playing CDs with compressed audio files,
it can take the CD player approx. 1 minute to
read in the data, depending on the directory
structure.
To start playback when there is already a CD in
the drive:
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to call up
"Entertainment".
3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Select "CD" and press
the controller.
4. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the second field from the top. On cars with a
CD changer, select "CD" and press the
controller to start the CD player.
Playback starts automatically if the sound out-
put is switched on.
Via programmable memory keys
You can store the CD player function on the
programmable memory keys to start the CD
player, refer to page 21.
Starting the CD changer
Fill and insert the CD magazine, refer to
page 173.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to call up
"Entertainment".
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
CD player and CD changer
170
3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Select "CD" and press
the controller.
4. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the second field from the top. Select the
desired CD and press the controller.
At the end of the last track, the next CD is
selected and played.
If new CDs have been placed in the CD maga-
zine, playback starts with the lowest CD, e.g.
CD 1, track 1.
The CD magazine's load status is indicated on
the Control Display.
Via programmable memory keys
You can store a CD compartment of the CD
changer on the programmable memory keys to
start the CD changer, refer to page 21.
Selecting a track
Buttons on the CD player
Press the button for the appropriate
direction as often as necessary until the desired
track is reached.
The track is displayed on the Control Display.
You can also change the track with the buttons
on the steering wheel, refer to page 11.
Via iDrive
Turn the controller to select a track.
Compressed audio files*
1. Select a directory, if necessary, and press
the controller.
2. Select a track and press the controller.
To change the directory:
Select the directory and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
171
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
To exit from the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
If the car is equipped with two CD drives, you
can save specific tracks on the programmable
memory keys, refer to page 21.
Displaying information about the
track*
With compressed audio files, any information
about the current track that has been recorded
can be displayed, e.g. the name of the artist.
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Details" and press the controller.
The information is shown for the current track.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Sampling tracks, Scan
All tracks on the current CD are automatically
sampled once in succession.
1. Select "Set" and press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.
Stop sampling:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.
Track sampling is interrupted and the selected
track is played on.
Compressed audio files*
1. Select the current track and press the con-
troller.
2. Select the desired menu item:
> To sample all the tracks in the current
directory, select "Scan directory" and
press the controller.
> To sample all the tracks on the CD,
select "Scan all" and press the control-
ler.
Stop sampling:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Scan directory" or "Scan all" and
press the controller.
Sampling is interrupted and the selected track
is retained.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
CD player and CD changer
172
Repeating tracks
1. Select "Set" and press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
2. Select "Repeat" and press the controller.
The current track on the CD is repeated.
Stop repeating:
1. Press the controller again.
2. Select "Repeat" and press the controller.
Compressed audio files*
1. Select the current track and press the con-
troller.
2. Select the desired menu item:
> To repeat the selected track, select
"Repeat track" and press the controller.
> To repeat all the tracks in the current
directory, select "Repeat directory" and
press the controller.
Stop repeating:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Repeat track" or "Repeat directory"
and press the controller.
Random play sequence
The tracks on the current CD are played once
each in random order.
1. Select "Set" and press the controller.
Other menu items are displayed.
2. Select "Random" and press the controller.
Stop random function:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Random" and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
173
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Compressed audio files*
1. Select the current track and press the con-
troller.
2. Select the desired menu item:
> To play all the tracks in the current direc-
tory in random order, select "Random
directory" and press the controller.
> To play all the tracks on the CD in ran-
dom order, select "Random all" and
press the controller.
Stop random function:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Random directory" or "Random all"
and press the controller.
Fast forward/reverse
Buttons on the CD player:
Press and hold the button for the
corresponding direction.
The tracks can be heard, but reproduction is
distorted.
CD magazine
Sedan
Sports Wagon
The BMW CD changer for six CDs is behind the
left side panel in the cargo bay.
Removing the CD magazine
To insert or remove CDs from the CD magazine,
you must first remove it from the CD changer:
1. Push the cover to one side, arrow 1.
2. Press the button, arrow 2.
The CD magazine is ejected.
Inserting/removing CDs from the CD
magazine
When loading CDs into or removing them from
the CD magazine, hold them at their edges and
do not touch the reflective signal-sensing area.
Inserting CDs:
Insert the CD in its slot with the label side on
top.
Removing CDs:
Pull out the desired drawer, see arrow, and
remove the CD.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
CD player and CD changer
174
Inserting the CD magazine
Insert the CD magazine all the way in the direc-
tion of arrow 1 and close the cover, arrow 2.
The CD changer automatically reads in the
loaded CDs and is then ready for operation.
Notes
BMW CD/DVD players and changers are
officially designated Class 1 laser prod-
ucts. Do not operate if the cover is damaged,
otherwise severe eye damage can result.
Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs with labels
applied as these can become detached during
playback due to heat build-up and can cause
irreparable damage to the device.
Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard
diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play CDs/
DVDs with an adapter, e.g. Single-CDs, other-
wise the CDs or the adapter can jam and will no
longer eject.
Do not use a combined CD/DVD, e.g. DVD
Plus
,
otherwise the CD/DVD can jam and will no
longer eject.<
General malfunctions
BMW CD/DVD changers and players have been
optimized for performance in vehicles. In some
instances they may be more sensitive to faulty
CDs/DVDs than stationary devices would be.
If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check if it
has been inserted correctly.
Humidity
High levels of humidity can lead to condensa-
tion on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens and
temporarily prevent playback.
Malfunctions with individual CDs/DVDs
If malfunctions only occur with individual CDs/
DVDs, one of the following factors may be the
cause.
Self-recorded CDs/DVDs
Possible reasons for malfunctions with self-
recorded CDs/DVDs are, e.g., inconsistent
data-creation or recording processes, or poor
quality or high age of the CD/DVD blank.
Only label CDs/DVDs on the top, with a pen
designed for this purpose.
Damage prevention
Avoid leaving fingerprints, as well as dust,
scratches or moisture on the CDs/DVDs.
Keep CDs/DVDs in protective sleeves or cases.
Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures over
1207/506, high levels of humidity or direct
sunlight.
CDs/DVDs with copy protection
CDs/DVDs are often copy-protected by the
manufacturer. This can mean that some CDs/
DVDs cannot be played or can only be played to
a limited extent.
Care
Clean the reflective signal side of CDs/DVDs as
needed by wiping it with a commercially avail-
able cleaning tissue in straight lines from the
center of the disc outwards. For more informa-
tion on taking care of CDs/DVDs, please refer to
the Caring for your vehicle brochure.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
175
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
AUX-In port
You can connect an external audio device, for
instance an MP3 player, and play audio tracks
over the car's loudspeaker system. You can
adjust the tone using iDrive.
Connecting
Lift up the center armrest.
Connection for audio playback:
TRS connector 1/8"/3.5 mm
To play audio tracks over the car's loudspeaker
system, connect the headset or line-out port of
the external device to the AUX-in port.
Starting audio playback
The audio device must be switched on.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to call up
"Entertainment".
3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "AUX" is selected and press the con-
troller.
4. Select "AUX IN" and press the controller.
5. Adjust volume and tone, if necessary.
Via programmable memory keys
You can store the "AUX" function on a program-
mable memory key to start audio playback, refer
to page 21.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
USB-audio interface
176
USB-audio interface
You can connect audio devices, e.g. an iPod or
a USB device (MP3 player, USB stick) to the
USB-audio interface. They can be operated via
iDrive.
Standard audio formats, e.g. MP3, WMA, WAV
(PCM) and AAC, and playlists in the M3U format
can be played.
Due the variety of audio devices on the market,
it cannot be guaranteed that every device will
be operable on the vehicle.
Ask your BMW center about what audio devices
are suitable.
Connecting
Lift up the center armrest.
1 Connection for audio playback:
TRS connector 1/8"/3.5 mm
2 USB interface
Depending on your vehicle's equipment
version, it may contain a storage pouch
for your audio device. The pouch is located
under the center armrest.<
iPod
To connect the iPod use the BMW cable
adapter for Apple iPod. For more information,
contact the BMW center or go to the Internet:
www.bmw.com
To play audio tracks over the vehicle's loud-
speaker system, connect the iPod to ports 1
and 2.
The iPod's menu structure is supported by the
USB-audio interface.
USB device
To connect the device, use the included
flexible adapter cable to protect the USB
interface and your USB device against physical
damage.<
To play audio tracks over the vehicle's loud-
speaker system, connect the USB device to
port 2.
After the device is connected for the first time,
the information on all tracks (e.g. artist, type of
music) and the playlists are transferred from the
USB device to the vehicle. This procedure may
take some time. The duration depends on the
USB device and the number of tracks.
During transfer, you can select the tracks using
the directories and file names.
After transfer, you can call up the tracks using
the information and playlists.
Information from up to four USB devices or for
about 20,000 tracks can be stored on the vehi-
cle.
If a fifth USB device is connected and if more
than 20,000 tracks are to be stored, the infor-
mation on existing tracks may be lost.
Music tracks with integrated Digital
Rights Management (DRM) cannot be
played.<
Starting audio playback
Via iDrive
If the audio device has a device name, the name
is displayed.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller backwards to call up
"Entertainment".
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
177
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "AUX" is selected and press the con-
troller.
4. Select "USB" or the name of the audio
device and press the controller.
Playback begins with the first track.
Via programmable memory keys
You can store the "USB" function on a pro-
grammable memory key to start audio play-
back, refer to page 21.
Selecting a track
You can call up the tracks using the playlists
and information. With USB devices you can also
call up tracks using the file directory. The tracks
can be displayed if they have been stored in the
Latin alphabet.
1. Make your selection, e.g. "Playlists" or "Art-
ists", and press the controller.
2. Select a track and press the controller.
Displaying information about the track
Any information about the current track that has
been recorded can be displayed, e.g. the name
of the artist.
1. Press the controller during playback.
2. Select "Details" and press the controller.
The information is shown for the current track.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
USB-audio interface
178
Repeating tracks
1. Select the current track and press the con-
troller.
2. Select "Repeat track" and press the con-
troller.
Stop repeating:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Repeat track" and press the con-
troller.
Random play sequence
You can play the tracks in the selected list in
random order, e.g. all tracks of a single artist.
1. Select the current track and press the con-
troller.
2. Select "Random" and press the controller.
Stop random play:
1. Press the controller.
2. Select "Random" and press the controller.
Fast forward/reverse
Buttons on the steering wheel or CD player:
Press and hold the button for the
corresponding direction.
Notes
Do not expose the audio device to
extreme environmental conditions, e.g.
very high temperatures, refer to the operating
instructions of the audio device. Otherwise the
audio device may become damaged, which
could compromise safety while driving.<
Depending on the configuration of the audio
files, e.g. bit rates greater than 256 KBit/s, the
files may not play back correctly in every case.
Notes on connecting
> The USB-audio interface acts as the power
supply to the connected audio devices, pro-
vided that this is supported by the audio
device. Therefore, do not connect the USB
audio device to the power socket in the
vehicle during operation.
> Do not forcibly connect the plug to the USB
interface.
> Do not connect devices such as fans or
lamps to the USB-audio interface.
> Do not connect USB hard disks.
> Do not use the USB-audio interface to
charge external devices.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Communications
This chapter describes how to use the
telephone, BMW Assist and TeleService.
Communications
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Telephoning
182
Telephoning
The concept
Your BMW is equipped with a full mobile phone
preparation package. After pairing a suitable
mobile phone with the vehicle once, you can
operate the mobile phone via iDrive, the buttons
on the steering wheel or via voice commands.
Once a mobile phone has been paired with your
vehicle, it is automatically recognized as soon
as it is inside the vehicle while the engine is run-
ning or the ignition is switched on. You can
store the pairing data for up to four mobile
phones simultaneously. If several mobile
phones are detected at the same time, the
mobile phone last paired can be operated via
the vehicle.
Using the telephone inside
the vehicle
Using the snap-in adapter*
The so-called snap-in adapter, a holder for
mobile phones, allows you to charge the mobile
phone's battery and connect the mobile phone
to your vehicle's outside antenna. This ensures
better network reception and consistent repro-
duction quality. Please contact your
BMW center to find out for which mobile
phones there are snap-in adapters available.
For your safety
A car phone makes life more convenient in
many ways, and can even save lives in an emer-
gency. While you should consult your mobile
phone's separate Owner's Manual for a detailed
description of safety precautions and informa-
tion, we request that you direct your particular
attention to the following:
Only make entries when the traffic situa-
tion allows you to do so. Do not hold the
mobile phone in your hand while you are driving;
use the hands-free system instead. If you do
not observe this precaution, your being dis-
tracted can endanger vehicle occupants and
other road users.<
Suitable mobile phones
Please ask your BMW center which mobile
phones with Bluetooth interface are supported
by the mobile phone preparation package and/
or which mobile phones are compatible with the
snap-in adapter. By virtue of their particular
software versions, these mobile phones sup-
port the functions described in this Owner's
Manual. Malfunctions may occur with other
mobile phones.
Care instructions
You can find what you need to know about car-
ing for your mobile phone in the separate Caring
for your vehicle brochure and in the mobile
phone Owner's Manual.
Operating options
You can operate the mobile phone
*
using:
> Buttons on the steering wheel, refer to
page 10
> iDrive, refer to page 187
> Voice commands, refer to page 193
> Programmable memory keys, refer to
page 21
Avoid operating a mobile phone recognized by
the vehicle via the mobile phone's keypad, oth-
erwise malfunctions may result.
Making phone calls with the
BMW Assist system*: BMW Assist
calls
You can use the BMW Assist System via the
hands-free unit for BMW Assist calls.
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
183
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
When the status information "BMW Assist" or
"BMW Service" is displayed in "Communica-
tion", only BMW Assist calls are possible.
It may not be possible to establish a telephone
connection using the mobile phone while a con-
nection is being established to BMW Assist or
while a call to BMW Assist is already in
progress. If this happens, you must unpair the
mobile phone and the vehicle if you wish to
place a call with the mobile phone.
Start-up
Pairing the mobile phone with the
vehicle
The following prerequisites must be met:
> Compatible mobile phone: the mobile
phone is supported by the full preparation
package mobile phone. You can obtain
information on the Internet at:
www.bmw.com
> The mobile phone is ready to operate.
> The Bluetooth link is activated in the vehi-
cle, refer to page 187, and in the mobile
phone.
> Depending on the mobile phone, some
default settings may be necessary for the
mobile phone: e.g. using the following
menu items:
> Bluetooth switched on
> Connection without confirmation
> Reconnection
> Depending on the mobile phone type, the
power-saving mode setting, for example,
may result in a paired mobile phone not
being detected by the vehicle.
> For pairing purposes, define any number as
the Bluetooth passkey, e.g. 1. This Blue-
tooth passkey is no longer required after
pairing has been successful.
> The ignition is switched on.
Pair the mobile phone with the vehicle
only when the car is stationary, to avoid
endangering the car's occupants and other
road users by being distracted.<
Switch on ignition
1. Insert remote control all the way into the
ignition lock.
2. Switch on ignition without operating the
brake or clutch or pressing the start/stop
button.
Preparation via iDrive
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
3. Press the button to call up the start
menu.
4. Press the controller to open the menu.
5. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
6. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Telephoning
184
7. Move the highlight marker to the second
field from the top, select "Phone" and press
the controller.
8. Select "Pair new phone" and press the con-
troller.
9. Select "Start pairing" and press the control-
ler.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis-
played.
Preparation via the mobile phone
10. Further steps must be carried out with the
mobile phone and vary depending on the
model. Please refer to your mobile phone's
operating instructions, e.g. under the topics
of Searching for a Bluetooth device, Linking
or Pairing.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle also
appears on the mobile phone display.
11. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on
the mobile phone display.
Pairing
Depending on your mobile phone, you will see
messages, first on the mobile phone display or
on the iDrive, requesting you to enter the same
Bluetooth passkey previously determined by
you.
12. Enter the Bluetooth passkey.
Depending on the mobile phone, you will
have approx. 30 seconds to enter your
Bluetooth passkey on the mobile phone
and the Control Display.
13. Move the highlight marker to the third field
from the top, select "Confirm passkey" and
press the controller.
14. Wait several seconds until the "Communi-
cation" menu is displayed.
The next time you use the mobile phone inside
the vehicle, it will be recognized within no more
than 2 minutes as long as the engine is running
or the ignition is switched on.
With some mobile phones it may be nec-
essary to make certain settings for a per-
manent Bluetooth link, e.g. using the authoriza-
tion or secure connection menu item, refer to
your mobile phone's operating instructions.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
185
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
As soon as a mobile phone is detected by the
vehicle, the phone book entries stored on the
SIM card or on your mobile phone are transmit-
ted to the vehicle. This data transfer depends
on your mobile phone and can take several min-
utes; please refer to your mobile phone's oper-
ating instructions, if necessary.
If not all phone book entries are displayed:
> Transfer all phone book entries from the
SIM card to the mobile phone, if necessary.
> Phone book entries with special characters
may not be displayed.
Up to four mobile phones can be paired, one
after the other. If a fifth mobile phone is paired,
the pairing data for the mobile phone whose
pairing data was first stored on the vehicle is
deleted.
Checks to perform if pairing is
unsuccessful
> Is the mobile phone supported by the
mobile phone preparation package? You
can obtain information on the Internet at:
www.bmw.com.
> Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile
phone and vehicle match? The same Blue-
tooth passkey must be entered on the
mobile phone's display and via iDrive.
> Did it take you more than 30 seconds to
enter the Bluetooth passkey?
> Only a limited number of devices can be
connected with the mobile phone. If neces-
sary, delete connections with other devices.
> Is the mobile phone no longer responding?
Switch the mobile phone off and on or
briefly disconnect the power supply.
To repeat pairing:
1. Select "Restart pairing" and press the con-
troller.
2. Repeat steps 9 to 14.
If pairing fails again, contact BMW Customer
Relations.
To call BMW Customer Relations:
Select "Help" and press the controller.
The phone number for BMW Customer Rela-
tions and information necessary for pairing
appear on the display. In mobile phones that are
already connected, you can select the BMW
Customer Relations phone number to place the
call.
List of paired mobile phones
Mobile phones with pairing data stored by the
vehicle can be displayed. If several mobile
phones are detected by the vehicle at the same
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Telephoning
186
time, the mobile phone at the top of the list can
be operated via the vehicle.
You can change the order of the mobile phones
on the list. As long as a mobile phone from this
list is selected, you cannot operate the mobile
phones via the vehicle.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button to call up the start
menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.
5. Move the highlight marker to the second
field from the top, select "Phone" and press
the controller.
6. Select the desired mobile phone and press
the controller.
7. Select "Move device up" and press the con-
troller.
The selected mobile phone moves up one posi-
tion on the list.
Unpairing the mobile phone from the
vehicle
Should you no longer wish to operate a mobile
phone via the vehicle, you can delete the mobile
phone's pairing data.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Switch off the mobile phone.
2. Press the button to call up the start
menu.
3. Press the controller to open the menu.
4. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
5. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.
"Bluetooth" is selected.
6. Move the highlight marker to the second
field from the top, select "Phone" and press
the controller.
7. Select the desired mobile phone and press
the controller.
8. Select "Delete device" and press the con-
troller.
The unpaired mobile phone is deleted from the
list.
The phone book entries and the lists of stored
phone numbers are deleted as well.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
187
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Activating/deactivating the Bluetooth
link
The use of Bluetooth technology is not
permitted in all countries. Observe all
applicable local regulations. Temporarily deac-
tivate the Bluetooth link between the vehicle
and the mobile phone, if necessary.
If the Bluetooth link is deactivated, you can no
longer operate the mobile phone via the vehicle,
and other devices with a Bluetooth interface
can be used in combination with the mobile
phone, e.g. a laptop.<
To temporarily deactivate the Bluetooth link
between the vehicle and your mobile phone:
1. Press the button to call up the start
menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.
5. Move the highlight marker to the second
field from the top, select "Settings" and
press the controller.
6. Select "Bluetooth communication active"
and press the controller to activate or deac-
tivate the link.
The Bluetooth link is activated.
The Bluetooth link is deactivated.
Adjusting volume
Turn the knob during a call to select the desired
volume.
This volume for the hands-free system is main-
tained, even if the other audio sources are set to
minimum volume.
You can also adjust the volume with buttons on
the steering wheel, refer to page 10.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Operation via iDrive
You can operate the following functions using
iDrive:
> Accepting/rejecting calls
> dialing phone numbers
> Selecting phone numbers from the phone
book
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Telephoning
188
> Selecting stored phone numbers, e.g. from
the list of accepted calls
> Ending a call
When the ignition and radio readiness are
switched off, e.g. after taking the remote control
out of the ignition switch, you can continue an
ongoing call via the hands-free system for no
more than 25 minutes.
Voice quality
If the person you are talking to is having difficul-
ties understanding you, this may be due to
excessive background noise. The full mobile
phone preparation package can compensate
for these noises to a certain extent. To optimize
voice quality during a call, we recommend that
you:
> Reduce background noise, e.g. by closing
the windows, reducing air flow from the
automatic climate control or by pointing the
open front air vents downward
> Reduce the volume of the hands-free sys-
tem
Requirements
> The mobile phone's pairing data are stored
by the vehicle and the mobile phone is oper-
ational.
> The engine is running or the ignition is
switched on.
> The mobile phone is recognized by the
vehicle.
Calling up communication
Many of the functions described below are con-
trolled using the "Communication" menu.
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button to call up the start
menu.
2. Move the controller forwards to call up
"Communication".
Receiving calls
If you have the phone number of the caller
stored in the phone book and the phone num-
ber has been transmitted, the name of the entry
is displayed.
Accepting a call
press the button on the steering wheel.
Alternatively:
"Accept" is selected.
Press the controller.
Rejecting a call
Select "Reject" and press the controller.
The caller is diverted to your mailbox if it has
been activated.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
189
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Calling
Dialing phone numbers
1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.
2. Select "Dial" and press the controller.
3. Enter the desired phone number by select-
ing the digits individually and pressing the
controller.
Always enter the complete phone number
consisting of national dialing code, area
code, and phone number.
The letters correspond to the numbers on
the keypad of the mobile phone.
To delete the last digit:
Move the controller towards the right to
select the arrow and press the control-
ler.
4. Select "Dial number" and press the control-
ler.
Alternatively: press the button on the
steering wheel.
For your phone number to be displayed to the
person you are talking to, the display of phone
numbers must be enabled by your provider.
Via programmable memory keys
You can store phone numbers on the program-
mable memory keys to call these numbers
directly, refer to page 21.
Ending a call
Press the button on the steering wheel.
Alternatively:
1. Select the phone number and press the
controller.
2. "End call" is selected.
Press the controller.
Selecting a phone number from the
phone book or from a list of stored
phone numbers
Phone numbers you have dialed, received calls
and phone book entries are stored in lists when
the mobile phone is linked to the vehicle via
Bluetooth. If the caller is listed in the phone
book, the name of the entry is displayed instead
of the phone number.
You can select the desired subscriber from the
list and establish the connection.
Five lists are available:
> "A - Z"
The entries in your mobile phone's phone
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Telephoning
190
book, consisting of names and phone num-
bers, are sorted alphabetically.
> "Top 8"
The eight numbers dialed most frequently
from the "A - Z" phone book are automati-
cally stored in the Top 8 list.
> "Redial"
The last eight phone numbers you have
dialed are automatically stored. The last
number dialed is at the top of the list.
> "Missed calls"
The phone numbers of the last eight
rejected calls are stored. This requires the
telephone number of the caller to have been
transmitted.
> "Received calls"
The phone numbers of the last eight
accepted calls are stored. This requires the
telephone number of the caller to have been
transmitted.
Selecting phone numbers from phone
book
The "A - Z" list is available for your phone book
entries. The phone book entries appear on the
Control Display.
1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.
2. Select "A - Z" and press the controller.
3. To limit the number of displayed entries,
select the initial letter of the desired entry
and press the controller.
4. Select the desired entry and press the con-
troller.
5. Select "Call" and press the controller.
The system dials the number.
If different phone numbers are stored in the
mobile phone under one name, e.g. office and
home, the name is shown once for each phone
number.
You can change a phone number stored in the
phone book, e.g. to call a specific extension:
1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.
2. Select "A - Z" and press the controller.
3. Select the desired entry and press the con-
troller.
4. Select "Add digits" and press the controller.
5. Change the phone number.
6. Select "Dial number" and press the control-
ler.
Dialing a stored phone number from a
list
To select an entry and establish a connection:
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
191
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.
2. Select a list and press the controller:
> "Top 8"
> "Redial"
> "Missed calls"
> "Received calls"
3. Select the desired entry and press the con-
troller.
4. Select "Call" and press the controller.
The system dials the number.
Deleting an individual entry
1. Select the desired entry from the list and
press the controller.
2. Select "Delete" and press the controller.
The entry is deleted.
Deleting the entire list
1. Select an entry from the list and press the
controller.
2. Select "Delete all numbers" and press the
controller.
3. If applicable, select "Yes" and press the
controller.
The list is deleted.
BMW Contact*
If BMW Assist has not been enabled for you,
you can have several service numbers dis-
played:
> BMW Roadside Assistance
*
if you need
help in the event of a breakdown
> BMW Service if you wish to schedule a ser-
vice appointment, for example
> BMW Customer Relations
*
for information
related to your vehicle
If BMW Assist is enabled, refer to page 197.
You can dial the displayed service numbers if
your mobile phone has been paired with the
vehicle:
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller forwards to select
"Communication".
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Telephoning
192
3. Select "BMW Contact" and press the con-
troller.
4. Select "BMW Contact Numbers" and press
the controller.
5. Select one of the following menu items and
press the controller:
> "Roadside Assistance"
> "Customer Relations"
> "Service Request"
6. Select "Call" and press the controller.
Contact will be established.
Dialing phone numbers via touch tones
Touch-tone dialing is required for access to
network services or for controlling devices, e.g.
for remote querying on an answering machine.
This function is available whenever there is a
connection.
1. Establish connection.
2. Move the controller backwards until the
bottom field is selected.
3. Select the desired touch-tone character
and press the controller.
Each selection is transmitted immediately
and is confirmed by a tone, depending on
the type of mobile phone you are using.
Switching between mobile
phone and hands-free system
From mobile phone to hands-free
system*
You can continue ongoing calls outside of the
vehicle's Bluetooth range via the hands-free
system as long as the engine is running or the
ignition is switched on. Depending on your
mobile phone, the system automatically
switches to hands-free mode.
With mobile phones that do not automatically
switch to hands-free mode:
> Depending on the type of mobile phone you
are using, it may be possible to continue the
conversation via the hands-free system.
Refer to the display on your mobile phone
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
193
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
and/or your mobile phone's operating
instructions.
> Press the button above the storage
compartment. The changeover can take
several seconds.
From hands-free system to mobile
phone
If you are making a call via the hands-free sys-
tem, it may be possible to continue the call via
the mobile phone, depending on your mobile
phone model. Refer to the display on your
mobile phone and/or your mobile phone's oper-
ating instructions.
Alternatively, you can deactivate the Bluetooth
link.
Depending on the type of mobile phone you are
using, it may occur that calls are switched from
the hands-free system to the mobile phone if
reception of the wireless network is poor.
Operation by voice
commands*
The concept
You can operate your mobile phone without
having to take a hand off the steering wheel.
During your entries, you will be guided in many
cases by announcements or questions.
The same prerequisites apply as for operation
via iDrive, refer to page 187.
Symbols in the Owner's Manual
Saying commands
Activating the system
1. Briefly press the button on the steering
wheel.
A sound signal indicates that you can say
commands.
2. Say the command.
Ending/canceling operation by voice
commands
Press the button on the steering wheel
or
In dialogs where text is spoken, e.g. a name
rather than a command, canceling is only possi-
ble using the button on the steering wheel.
Having the possible commands read
aloud
The system recognizes specific commands
that must be pronounced exactly word for word.
You can have the possible commands for any
function read aloud to you:
Using alternative commands
Often there is more than a single command to
run a function, e.g.:
Digits from zero to nine are recognized.
You can say each digit individually or group
them into a sequence to accelerate the input.
{...}Say the specified commands word for
word.
{{...}} Indicates responses of the system.
{Cancel}.
{Help}
{Dial name} or {Name}.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Telephoning
194
Example: dialing phone numbers
Start the dialog:
Press the button on the steering wheel.
Adjusting the volume of the
instructions
You can adjust the volume for the instructions
from the system:
Turn the button during an instruction.
This volume for the instructions is maintained,
even if the other audio sources are set to mini-
mum volume.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Calling
Dialing phone numbers
The connection to the desired subscriber is
established.
Correcting phone numbers
After the last spoken sequence of digits has
been repeated by the system, you can delete
this sequence of digits.
The command {Correct number} can be
repeated as often as you like.
Deleting phone numbers
All digits entered up to this point are deleted.
Voice phone book
The phone book entries can be called up auto-
matically from your mobile phone's memory.
Selecting an entry
The connection to the phone number of the
selected entry is established.
Redialing
The {Redial} command calls up "Redial".
Command Voice control response
{Dial number}{{Please say the number}}
e.g. {123 456 7890} Depending on your equipment version:
{{123 456 7890. Continue?}} or
{{123 456 7890. And next?}}
{Dial}{{Dialing number}}
1. {Dial number}.
2. Say the phone number.
For telephone calls abroad, say {Plus}
and then the country code.
3. {Dial}.
{Correct number}.
The digits are deleted.
{Delete}.
1. {Dial name}.
The dialog for selecting an entry is
opened.
2. Say the name when prompted.
3. Confirm the prompt with {Yes}.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
195
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Notes
Important for voice commands
For voice commands, bear in mind the follow-
ing:
> Pronounce the commands smoothly and at
normal volume, avoiding excessive empha-
ses and pauses.
> Keep the doors, windows and glass roof
closed to prevent interference from outside
noise.
> Avoid ambient noise in the vehicle while
speaking.
Inserting/removing snap-in
adapter
1. Press area 1 around the button and take off
the cover
*
.
2. Insert the snap-in adapter in the front and
press it downward until it engages.
To remove the snap-in adapter:
Press area 1 around the button.
Inserting mobile phone
1. If applicable, remove the protective cap
from the mobile phone's antenna connector
so that the mobile phone can engage in the
snap-in adapter.
2. With its buttons facing upward, slide the
mobile phone up towards the electrical con-
tact points and press it downward until it
engages.
The mobile phone's battery is charged as soon
as the vehicle is in radio readiness or the steer-
ing is unlocked.
To conserve battery power, you should
avoid using the mobile phone when the
ignition is switched off.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Telephoning
196
Removing mobile phone
Press the button.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
197
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
BMW Assist
BMW Assist provides you with various services.
For example, the position data of your vehicle
can be transmitted to the BMW Assist
Response Center if an Emergency Request
*
has been sent.
Many BMW Assist services depend on the indi-
vidually agreed contract.
After your contract has expired, the
BMW Assist system will be deactivated by the
BMW Assist Response Center without you hav-
ing to visit a BMW center. After the BMW Assist
system has been deactivated, no BMW Assist
service will be available. The BMW Assist sys-
tem can be reactivated by a BMW center after a
new contract has been signed.
Requirements
You can use BMW Assist when the following
requirements are met:
> The installed BMW Assist system is logged
on to a mobile phone network. This network
must be capable of transmitting the ser-
vices.
> To transmit position data, the vehicle must
be able to determine the current position.
> To activate and update BMW Assist, a GPS
signal must be available.
> You have subscribed to BMW Assist with
your BMW center or with the BMW Assist
Response Center. Enabling must have
been completed.
> BMW Assist is activated, refer to page 202.
Offered services
The following services are available via
BMW Assist:
> Emergency Request, refer to page 235:
When you press the SOS button, a connec-
tion is established to the BMW Assist
Response Center. The BMW Assist
Response Center contacts you and takes
further steps to help you.
> Automatic Collision Notification:
Under certain conditions, a connection is
established to the BMW Assist Response
Center after a serious accident. If possible,
the BMW Assist Response Center contacts
you and takes further steps to help you.
> Enhanced Roadside Assistance:
You can call BMW Roadside Assistance
*
should you require help in the event of a
breakdown. If possible, the vehicle data and
position data are transmitted during this
call.
> Customer Relations:
For all information related to your vehicle
you can be connected with BMW Customer
Relations.
> TeleService:
Data on your vehicle's service status or
required inspections are transmitted to your
BMW center either automatically before a
service due date or when you request a
BMW service appointment.
> Remote Door Unlock:
Contact the BMW Assist Response Center
if your remote control or key is not available
and you would like to have the vehicle
unlocked.
> Stolen Vehicle Recovery:
After you report your vehicle stolen with the
police, call the BMW Assist Response Cen-
ter to determine its position.
In addition, optional services can be provided to
you, such as the Concierge service or informa-
tion on directions, traffic or the weather. You
can use Critical Calling to activate a limited
number of calls via the BMW Assist Response
Center, e.g. when you do not have your mobile
phone with you.
Press the SOS button in order to contact the
BMW Assist Response Center, see below.
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
BMW Assist
198
You can also access BMW Assist Concierge
services via the Internet.
Characteristics of the offered services
The following characteristics apply to the ser-
vices:
> The services offered are country-specific.
> Voice contact is established or data are
transferred, depending on the equipment
and the country. In some countries, it is
possible to do both.
> The data transmitted can be vehicle data,
for example, your current position or the
Condition Based Service CBS data.
Using services
Contacting the BMW Assist Response
Center
You can contact the BMW Assist Response
Center via the SOS button.
1. Briefly press the cover flap to open.
The arrangement of the switches and indi-
cator lamps varies slightly among vehicle
equipment versions.
2. Press the button for at least 2 seconds.
The BMW Assist Response Center will connect
you with BMW Roadside Assistance.
Roadside Assistance
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller forwards to select
"Communication".
3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "BMW Assist" is selected and press
the controller.
4. Select "Roadside Assistance" and press
the controller.
If the current location can be determined,
the current vehicle position is displayed.
5. Select "Start service" and press the con-
troller.
The BMW Assist Response Center will connect
you with BMW Roadside Assistance.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
199
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
TeleService
Automatic service notification*
The data on the service status of your vehicle or
on required inspections are transmitted auto-
matically prior to the due date. You can check
when the BMW center was notified.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Info sources" and press the control-
ler.
4. Select "Service Info" and press the control-
ler.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Service requirements" is selected and
press the controller.
6. Select "Auto Request" and press the con-
troller.
Manual service notification
You can transmit data regarding your vehicle's
service status to your BMW center when you
wish to arrange a service appointment.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller forwards to select
"Communication".
3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "BMW Assist" is selected and press
the controller.
4. Select "Service Request"
5. Press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
BMW Assist
200
6. Select "Start service" and press the con-
troller.
The service-relevant data are transmitted. Your
BMW center will contact you to arrange a ser-
vice appointment.
Contacting BMW Customer Relations
For all information related to your vehicle you
can call BMW Customer Relations.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller forwards to select
"Communication".
3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "BMW Assist" is selected and press
the controller.
4. Select "Customer Relations".
5. Press the controller.
6. Select "Start service" and press the con-
troller.
The BMW Assist Response Center will connect
you with BMW Customer Relations.
Concierge service*
When you call the BMW Assist Concierge, you
can obtain information about, e.g., current
events, gas stations or hotels, as well as receive
the corresponding telephone numbers and
addresses. Many hotels can be booked directly
through the BMW Assist Concierge service.
Concierge service requires additional enabling
by the BMW Assist Response Center.
Calling the Concierge
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Move the controller forwards to select
"Communication".
3. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "BMW Assist" is selected and press
the controller.
4. Select "Concierge" and press the control-
ler.
5. Select "Start Service" and press the con-
troller.
The BMW Assist Response Center will connect
you with a BMW Assist Concierge.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
201
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Displaying transmitted data
Select a received message, if applicable, and
press the controller.
Dialing a phone number or transferring
an address for destination guidance
1. Select "Options" and press the controller.
2. Select a menu item:
> Press "Call" to make a telephone call. A pre-
requisite for this is that your Bluetooth
mobile phone has been paired with the
vehicle.
> Press "Select as destination" to transfer the
address to the navigation system for desti-
nation guidance.
Adapting BMW Assist
Displaying and updating services
If the services offered by BMW Assist change,
you will be notified. In that event you may
update the service functions.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "BMW Service set-
tings" is selected and press the controller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Enabled services" is selected and
press the controller.
The currently available BMW Assist ser-
vices are displayed.
6. If necessary, select "Options" and press the
controller.
7. Select "Update services" and press the
controller.
Terminating services*
When you terminate the services, the connec-
tion to BMW Assist is deactivated.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
BMW Assist
202
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "BMW Service set-
tings" is selected and press the controller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Enabled services" is selected and
press the controller.
6. Select "Options" and press the controller.
7. Select "Terminate services" and press the
controller.
BMW Assist is blocked from use, and your vehi-
cle's current position will not be transmitted in
case of an Emergency Request
*
. To unblock
the services, reactivate BMW Assist, see below.
The contractual agreement is not affected by
this.
Reactivate BMW Assist, if necessary, to log on
again.
Activating BMW Assist
BMW Assist must be activated to use the ser-
vices.
Requirements
> Make sure that the vehicle can determine its
current location. Reception is best when
you have an unobstructed view to the sky.
> Leave vehicle ignition switched on during
the activation process.
Activating
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "BMW Service set-
tings" is selected and press the controller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
203
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
until "Enabled services" is selected and
press the controller.
6. Select "Enable services" and press the con-
troller.
BMW Assist is activated and data exchange
with the BMW Assist Response Center
begins.
Activation takes a few minutes. Progress status
is displayed on the Control Display. If you open
another menu, the activation process continues
in the background.
Displaying vehicle data
When BMW Assist is activated, the license
plate and the vehicle identification number of
your vehicle may be displayed.
1. Open the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
4. Select "BMW Service settings" and press
the controller.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Profile" is selected and press the con-
troller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Mobility
This section helps you maintain your car's
mobility by supplying important information
on vital topics including fuels and lubricants,
wheels and tires, service, maintenance and
breakdown assistance.
Mobility
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Refueling
206
Refueling
Always switch off the engine before refu-
eling, otherwise, fuel cannot be added to
the tank and a message will be displayed.<
Take all precautionary measures and
observe all applicable regulations when
handling fuel. Do not carry any spare fuel con-
tainers in your vehicle. They can develop a leak
and cause an explosion or cause a fire in the
event of an accident.<
Fuel filler door
Opening
1. Open fuel filler door. To do so, lightly press
the rear edge.
2. Turn the gas cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the gas cap in the bracket attached to
the fuel filler door.
Closing
Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly
hear a click.
Do not pinch the band attached to the
cap, otherwise the cap cannot be closed
properly and fuel vapors can escape. A mes-
sage will be displayed if the gas cap is loose or
missing.<
Manually releasing the fuel filler door
In the event of a malfunction, you can release
the fuel filler door manually:
Sedan
1. Remove the cover from the right-hand side-
wall of the cargo bay.
2. Pull the knob with the fuel pump symbol.
The fuel filler door is released.
Sports Wagon
1. Fold up the cargo bay floor panel.
2. Remove the cover from the right-hand side-
wall of the cargo bay. To do so, turn the
screws, arrows 1, 90° and take out the
cover, arrow 2.
3. Pull the knob with the fuel pump symbol.
The fuel filler door is released.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Mobility
207
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Observe the following when refueling
When handling fuels, follow the safety
instructions provided at filling stations,
otherwise there is a risk of personal injury or
property damage.<
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com-
pletely into the filler pipe. Avoid lifting the filler
nozzle while filling the tank, as that would lead
to
> premature pump shutoff
> reduced efficiency of the fuel-vapor recov-
ery system.
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Fuel tank capacity
Approx. 16.1 US gallons/61 liters, including the
reserve capacity of 2.1 US gallons/8 liters.
Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km, otherwise engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<
Fuel specifications
Do not fill the tank with leaded fuel, as this
would cause permanent damage to the
catalytic converter.
Do not fill the tank with E85, i.e. fuel containing
85% ethanol, nor with FlexFuel. Otherwise the
engine and fuel supply system will be dam-
aged.<
Required fuel
Super Premium Gasoline/AKI 91
This gasoline is highly recommended.
However, you may also use gasoline with less
AKI. The minimum AKI Rating is:
> 323i, 328i/xi: 87
> 335i/xi: 89.
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat-
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high outside temperatures.
This has no effect on the engine life.
Do not use any gasoline below the speci-
fied minimum fuel grade. Otherwise the
engine could be damaged.<
Use high-quality brands
Field experience has indicated significant dif-
ferences in fuel quality: volatility, composition,
additives, etc., among gasolines offered for sale
in the United States and Canada. Fuels contain-
ing up to and including 10% ethanol or other
oxygenates with up to 2.8% oxygen by weight,
that is, 15% MTBE or 3% methanol plus an
equivalent amount of co-solvent, will not void
the applicable warranties with respect to
defects in materials or workmanship.
The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
driveability, starting and stalling problems
especially under certain environmental condi-
tions such as high ambient temperature and
high altitude.
Should you encounter driveability problems
which you suspect could be related to the fuel
you are using, we recommend that you respond
by switching to a recognized high-quality brand
such as gasoline that is advertised as Top Tier
Detergent Gasoline.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may also result in unscheduled maintenance.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
208
Wheels and tires
Tire inflation pressures
Information for your safety
It is not merely the tires' service life, but also
driving comfort and, to a great extent, driving
safety that depend on the condition of the tires
and the maintenance of the specified tire pres-
sure.
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly
and correct it, if necessary: at least twice a
month and before starting long trips. If you fail
to observe this precaution you may be driving
on tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condi-
tion that can not only compromise your vehi-
cle's driving stability, but also lead to tire dam-
age and the risk of an accident. Do not drive
with deflated, i.e. flat tires, except when using
Run-Flat Tires. A flat tire will seriously impair
your vehicle's handling and braking response.
Attempts to drive on a flat tire can lead to loss of
control over the vehicle.<
Checking pressure
Only check tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold. This means after a maximum of
1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle has
been parked for at least 2 hours. When tires are
warm, the tire inflation pressure is higher.
After correcting tire inflation pressures,
always reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor,
refer to page 89.<
Inflation pressure specifications
The tables below provide all the correct inflation
pressures for the specified tire sizes at ambient
temperature.
The inflation pressures apply to the tire
sizes approved and tire brands recom-
mended by BMW; a list of these is available
from your BMW center.<
For correct identification of the right tire infla-
tion pressures, observe the following:
> Tire sizes for your vehicle
> Load conditions
> Maximum allowable driving speed
Tire inflation pressures for driving up to
100 mph or 160 km/h
For normal driving up to 100 mph or 160 km/h
and to achieve optimum driving comfort, adjust
pressures to the respective tire inflation pres-
sures listed on the following pages in the col-
umns for traveling speeds up to a maximum of
100mph or 160km/h.
These tire inflation pressures can also be found
on the driver's-side door post when the driver's
door is open.
The maximum permissible speed for
these tire pressures is 100 mph or
160 km/h. Do not exceed this speed, otherwise
tire damage and accidents could occur.<
Tire inflation pressures for driving
above 100 mph or 160 km/h
In order to drive at maximum speeds in
excess of 100 mph or 160 km/h, adjust
pressures to the respective tire inflation pres-
sures listed on the following pages in the col-
umns for traveling speeds including those
exceeding 100 mph or 160 km/h. Otherwise tire
damage and accidents could occur.<
Observe all national and local maximum speed
limits, otherwise violations of the laws could
occur.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Mobility
209
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Sedan: tire inflation pressures for the 323i, for Canada only
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds
up to a max. of
100 mph / 160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those exceeding
100mph / 160km/h
All pressure specifications in
the table are indicated in
psi/kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
without Sports package
205/55 R 16 91 H M+S
225/50 R 16 92 V
225/50 R 16 92 H M+S
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S
225/45 R 17 91 V
32/220 35/240 32/220 33/230 32/220 39/270
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 32/220 36/250 32/220 33/230 32/220 39/270
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 32/220 - 32/220 - 32/220 -
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 32/220 - 32/220 - 35/240
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W 32/220 - 32/220 - 32/220 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W - 36/250 - 33/230 - 39/270
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 35/240 - 32/220 - 35/240 -
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 41/280 - 33/230 - 41/280
with Sports package
225/50 R 16 92 V
225/50 R 16 92 H M+S
205/55 R 16 91 H M+S
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S
32/220 35/240 32/220 36/250 35/240 42/290
225/45 R 17 91 V 32/220 35/240 32/220 38/260 38/260 45/310
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 32/220 36/250 32/220 38/260 38/260 45/310
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 32/220 - 32/220 - 38/260 -
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 32/220 - 35/240 - 42/290
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W 32/220 - 33/230 - 36/250 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W - 36/250 - 36/250 - 44/300
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 35/240 - 33/230 - 38/260 -
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 41/280 - 36/250 - 44/300
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 245.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
210
Sedan: tire inflation pressures for the 328i
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds
up to a max. of
100mph / 160km/h
Traveling speeds
including those exceeding
100 mph / 160 km/h
All pressure specifications in
the table are indicated in
psi/kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
without Sports package
205/55 R 16 91 H M+S
225/50 R 16 92 V
225/50 R 16 92 H M+S
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S
225/45 R 17 91 V
32/220 36/250 32/220 35/240 32/220 39/270
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 32/220 36/250 32/220 35/240 33/230 41/280
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 32/220 - 32/220 - 32/220 -
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 32/220 - 32/220 - 36/250
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W 32/220 - 32/220 - 32/220 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W - 36/250 - 35/240 - 39/270
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y 32/220 - 32/220 - 32/220 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y - 36/250 - 32/220 - 36/250
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 35/240 - 32/220 - 35/240 -
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 41/280 - 35/240 - 41/280
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Mobility
211
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
with Sports package
205/55 R 16 91 H M+S
225/50 R 16 92 V
225/50 R 16 92 H M+S
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S
32/220 36/250 32/220 36/250 36/250 44/300
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL
225/45 R 17 91 V
32/220 36/250 32/220 39/270 39/270 46/320
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 32/220 - 32/220 - 39/270 -
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 32/220 - 35/240 - 41/280
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W 32/220 - 33/230 - 38/260 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W - 36/250 - 38/260 - 44/300
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y 32/220 - 32/220 - 32/220 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y - 36/250 - 35/240 - 41/280
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 35/240 - 33/230 - 38/260 -
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 41/280 - 38/260 - 44/300
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 245.
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds
up to a max. of
100 mph / 160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those exceeding
100mph / 160km/h
All pressure specifications in
the table are indicated in
psi/kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
212
Sedan: tire inflation pressures for the 328xi
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds
up to a max. of
100mph / 160km/h
Traveling speeds
including those exceeding
100 mph / 160 km/h
All pressure specifications in
the table are indicated in
psi/kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
without Sports package:
205/55 R 16 91 H M+S
225/50 R 16 92 H M+S
225/50 R 16 92 V
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL
225/45 R 17 91 W
32/220 36/250 32/220 35/240 35/240 41/280
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 32/220 - 32/220 - 35/240 -
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 32/220 - 32/220 - 36/250
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W 33/230 - 33/230 - 36/250 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W - 36/250 - 35/240 - 41/280
with Sports package:
205/55 R 16 91 H M+S
225/50 R 16 92 H M+S
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S
32/220 36/250 32/220 35/240 35/240 41/280
225/50 R 16 92 V
225/45 R 17 91 W
32/220 36/250 33/230 36/250 38/260 44/300
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 32/220 36/250 35/240 38/260 39/270 45/310
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 33/230 - 33/230 - 38/260 -
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 32/220 - 33/230 - 39/270
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W 33/230 - 38/260 - 41/280 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W - 36/250 - 38/260 - 345/310
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 245.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Mobility
213
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Sedan: tire inflation pressures for the 335i
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds
up to a max. of
100 mph / 160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those exceeding
100mph / 160km/h
All pressure specifications in
the table are indicated in
psi/kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
without Sports package:
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S
225/45 R 17 94 W
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL
32/220 38/260 32/220 36/250 35/240 42/290
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 32/220 - 32/220 - 35/240 -
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 33/230 - 32/220 - 36/250
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W 32/220 - 32/220 - 36/250 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W - 38/260 - 36/250 - 41/280
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y 32/220 - 32/220 - 33/230 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y - 38/260 - 32/220 - 38/260
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 38/260 - 35/240 - 38/260 -
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 42/290 - 36/250 - 42/290
with Sports package:
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S
225/45 R 17 94 W
32/220 38/260 32/220 38/260 36/250 44/300
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 32/220 38/260 35/240 41/280 39/270 46/320
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 32/220 - 33/230 - 38/260 -
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 33/230 - 35/240 - 41/280
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W 32/220 - 35/240 - 39/270 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W - 38/260 - 39/270 - 45/310
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y 32/220 - 32/220 - 36/250 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y - 38/260 - 35/240 - 41/280
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 38/260 - 36/250 - 39/270 -
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 42/290 - 39/270 - 45/310
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 245.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
214
Sedan: tire inflation pressures for the 335xi
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds
up to a max. of
100mph / 160km/h
Traveling speeds
including those exceeding
100 mph / 160 km/h
All pressure specifications in
the table are indicated in
psi/kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
without Sports package:
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL
225/45 R 17 91 W
33/230 36/250 33/230 35/240 36/250 42/290
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 W 33/230 - 33/230 - 36/250 -
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 W - 33/230 - 33/230 - 36/250
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W 36/250 - 36/250 - 39/270 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W - 36/250 - 36/250 - 42/290
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y 36/250 - 33/230 - 36/250 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y - 36/250 - 33/230 - 39/270
with Sports package:
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S 33/230 36/250 33/230 35/240 36/250 42/290
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 33/230 36/250 36/250 39/270 39/270 45/310
225/45 R 17 91 W 33/230 36/250 38/260 39/270 41/280 46/320
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 W 33/230 - 36/250 - 39/270 -
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 W - 33/230 - 36/250 - 41/280
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W 36/250 - 39/270 - 44/300 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W - 36/250 - 39/270 - 45/310
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y 36/250 - 36/250 - 39/270 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y - 36/250 - 36/250 - 41/280
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 245.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Mobility
215
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Sports Wagon: tire inflation pressures for the 328i
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds
up to a max. of
100 mph / 160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those exceeding
100mph / 160km/h
All pressure specifications in
the table are indicated in
psi/kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
without Sports package:
205/55 R 16 91 H M+S
225/50 R 16 92 H M+S
225/50 R 16 92 W
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S
225/45 R 17 91 W
32/220 39/270 32/220 36/250 36/250 44/300
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 33/230 41/280 32/220 38/260 38/260 45/310
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 32/220 - 32/220 - 36/250 -
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 35/240 - 33/230 - 39/270
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 38/260 - 32/220 - 38/260 -
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 45/310 - 38/260 - 45/310
with Sports package:
205/55 R 16 91 H M+S
225/50 R 16 92 H M+S
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S
32/220 39/270 32/220 36/250 36/250 44/300
225/50 R 16 92 W
225/45 R 17 91 W
32/220 39/270 32/220 39/270 39/270 46/320
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 33/230 41/280 35/240 42/290 44/300 51/350
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 32/220 - 32/220 - 38/260 -
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 35/240 - 38/260 - 45/310
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 38/260 - 33/230 - 41/280 -
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 45/310 - 41/280 - 48/330
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 245.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
216
Sports Wagon: tire inflation pressures for the 328xi
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds
up to a max. of
100mph / 160km/h
Traveling speeds
including those exceeding
100 mph / 160 km/h
All pressure specifications in
the table are indicated in
psi/kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
without Sports package:
205/55 R 16 91 H M+S
225/50 R 16 92 H M+S
225/50 R 16 92 W
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL
225/45 R 17 91 W
32/220 39/270 32/220 38/260 36/250 44/300
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 32/220 - 32/220 - 36/250 -
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 35/240 - 32/220 - 39/270
with Sports package:
205/55 R 16 91 H M+S
225/50 R 16 92 H M+S
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S
32/220 39/270 32/220 38/260 36/250 44/300
225/50 R 16 92 W
225/45 R 17 91 W
32/220 39/270 33/230 39/270 39/270 46/320
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 32/220 39/270 35/240 42/290 42/290 49/340
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 32/220 - 33/230 - 38/260 -
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 35/240 - 36/250 - 44/300
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 245.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Mobility
217
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Tire identification marks
Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire
makes it easier to identify and choose the right
tires.
Tire size
Speed code letter
Q = up to 100 mph or 160 km/h
T = up to 118 mph or 190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph or 210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph or 240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph or 270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph or 300 km/h
Tire Identification Number
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
the US Department of Transportation.
DOT code:
Tire age
The manufacturing date of tires is contained in
the tire coding: DOT … 3006 means that the
tire was manufactured in week 30 of 2006.
BMW recommends that you replace all tires
after 6 years at most, even if some tires may last
for 10 years.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Tread wear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
DOT Quality Grades
Tread wear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger car tires must conform to
Federal Safety Requirements in addition
to these grades.<
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov-
ernment test course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half (1γ) times as
well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, how-
ever, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteris-
tics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test sur-
faces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cor-
nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction charac-
teristics.<
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
e.g.
Nominal width in mm
Aspect ratio in Ξ
Radial belt construction
Rim diameter in inches
Load rating,
not on ZR tires
Speed code letter, in
front of the R on ZR tires
225/45 R
1
791 V
e.g.
Manufacturer's code
for tire make
Tire size and
tire design
Tire age
DOT xxxx xxx 0705
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
218
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to
a level of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehi-
cle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either sep-
arately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.<
RSC – Run-Flat Tires
You will recognize Run-Flat Tires by a circular
symbol containing the letters RSC on the side
of the tire, refer to page 219.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires.
These have better winter properties than sum-
mer tires.
XL
Designation for specially reinforced tires.
Tire condition
Inspect your tires frequently for tread wear,
signs of damage and for foreign objects lodged
in the tread. Check the tread depth.
Minimum tread depth
The tread depth should not drop below 1/8 in/
3 mm, although, for example, European legisla-
tion only specifies a minimum tread depth of
1/16 in/1.6 mm. At tread depths below 1/8 in/
3 mm there is an increased risk of high-speed
hydroplaning, even when only small amounts of
water are present on the road surface.
When winter tires wear down past a tread depth
of 1/6 in/4 mm, they become perceptibly less
suitable for winter conditions. In the interest of
safety, new tires should be installed.
Wear indicators in the base of the tread groove
are distributed around the tire's circumference;
the letters TWI, for Tread Wear Indicator, on the
tire's sidewalls identify tires that incorporate
these wear indicators. Once the tire tread has
worn down to the wear indicators, the tire has
worn to a depth of 1/16 in/1.6 mm.
Wheel/tire damage
Please note that low-profile tires cause wheels,
tires and suspension parts to be more suscep-
tible to road hazard and consequential dam-
ages.
Unusual vibrations encountered during normal
vehicle operation can indicate tire failure or
some other vehicle defect. This can, for exam-
ple, be caused by driving over curbs. The same
applies to any other abnormal road behavior,
such as pulling severely to the right or left.
In these cases, reduce speed immedi-
ately and have wheels and tires thor-
oughly checked. To do so, drive carefully to the
nearest BMW center or tire shop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
respondingly trained personnel. If necessary,
have the vehicle towed there.
Otherwise, tire damage can be extremely dan-
gerous for vehicle occupants and other road
users.<
Tire age
For various reasons, such as the development
of brittleness, BMW recommends tire replace-
ment after no more than 6 years, regardless of
the actual wear of the tires.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Mobility
219
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
The manufacturing date of tires is contained in
the tire coding:
DOT ... 0705 means that the tire was manufac-
tured in week 07 of 2005.
Run-Flat Tires
The symbol identifying Run-Flat Tires is a circle
with the letters RSC on the sidewall.
Run-Flat Tires comprise a conditionally self-
supporting tire and a special rim. The reinforce-
ment in the sidewalls ensures that the tire can
continue to be used subject to certain restric-
tions, even if depressurized.
For information on continuing to drive with a flat
tire, refer to Indication of a flat tire, page 90.
New wheels and tires
Have new wheels and tires installed only
by your BMW center or tire shop that
works according to BMW repair procedures
with correspondingly trained personnel. If this
work is not carried out properly, there is a dan-
ger of subsequent damage and related safety
hazards. Make sure that the new wheels are bal-
anced.<
Retreaded tires
BMW recommends that you do not use
retreaded tires, since driving safety may
be impaired. The causes for this include poten-
tially different tire casing structures and often
wide variations in tire age, which can result in a
limited service life.<
Correct wheels and tires
When mounting new tires or changing over
from summer to winter tires and vice versa,
mount Run-Flat Tires for your own safety. In the
event of a flat, no spare wheel is available. Your
BMW center will be glad to advise you.
For safety reasons, BMW recommends
that damaged Run-Flat Tires be replaced
rather than repaired. Otherwise, subsequent
damage cannot be ruled out.<
BMW recommends that you use only
wheel and tire combinations that BMW
has tested and approved for your particular
vehicle. Variations in factors such as manufac-
turing tolerances mean that even wheels and
tires with identical official size ratings could
actually have different dimensions, which could
lead to body contact and thus to severe acci-
dents. If non-approved wheels and tires are
used, BMW cannot evaluate their suitability,
and therefore cannot guarantee their driving
safety.<
You can inquire about the right wheel/tire com-
bination at your BMW center.
The correct combination of wheels and tires is
also necessary to ensure reliable operation of
various vehicle systems such as ABS, DSC or
RPA.
To maintain good handling and vehicle
response, use only tires of a single brand and
tread configuration. After a tire has been dam-
aged, mount the previous wheel and tire combi-
nation again as soon as possible.
Wheels with Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM electronics
When mounting new tires or changing over
from summer to winter tires, or vice versa, only
use wheels with TPM electronics; otherwise the
Tire Pressure Monitor may not be able to detect
a puncture, refer to page 90. Your BMW center
will be glad to advise you.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
220
Recommended tire brands
Certain makes of tire are recommended by
BMW for each tire size. They are marked with a
clearly visible BMW designation on the sidewall
of the tire.
When properly used, these tires meet the high-
est standards in terms of safety and handling
characteristics.
Special characteristics of winter tires
BMW recommends winter tires for use in cold
winter driving conditions. Although all-season
M+S tires provide better winter traction than
summer tires, they generally fail to provide the
same levels of cold-weather performance as
winter tires.
Pay attention to speed
Always comply with the speed limit for the
winter tires mounted on your car; failure
to do so could result in tire damage and acci-
dents.<
If the car is capable of speeds higher than that
permitted for the winter tires, a label stating the
maximum permitted speed for the mounted
tires must be displayed in your field of view.
Specialist tire dealers and your BMW center
can supply these labels.
Storage
Always store wheels and tires in a cool, dry
place with as little exposure to light as possible.
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
grease and fuels. Do not exceed the maximum
tire inflation pressure indicated on the sidewall
of the tire.
Swapping wheels between axles
BMW advises against swapping wheels
between the front and rear axles, even if all tires
have the same size, as this could impair driving
characteristics. If the tires are of mixed sizes,
swapping wheels between the axles is not per-
missible.
Snow chains*
Only certain fine-link snow chains have been
tested by BMW, classified as safe for use and
recommended. Consult your BMW center for
more information.
Snow chains must be mounted in pairs and on
the rear wheels only. Observe the manufac-
turer's instructions when mounting snow
chains. Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph or
50 km/h.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor if
snow chains are mounted, otherwise the
instrument might issue an incorrect reading.
When driving with snow chains, you may find it
helpful to activate DTC temporarily, refer to
page 87.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Mobility
221
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Under the hood
Do not work on the car unless you pos-
sess the necessary technical knowledge.
If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide-
lines, have any work on the vehicle performed
only by a BMW center or by a workshop that
work according to BMW repair procedures with
correspondingly trained personnel. If this work
is not carried out properly, there is a danger of
subsequent damage and related safety haz-
ards.<
Hood
Releasing
Pull the lever.
Opening
In order to avoid damage, make sure that
the wiper arms are against the windshield
before you open the hood.<
Press the release handle and open the hood.
Closing
Close the hood from a height of approx. 16 in/
40 cm with momentum. It must be clearly heard
to engage.
Make sure that the closing path of the
hood is clear, otherwise injuries may
result.
If you see any signs while driving your vehicle
that the hood is not completely closed, stop at
once and close it securely.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Under the hood
222
Important parts of the engine compartment
1 Expansion tank for coolant, refer to
page 224
2 Washer fluid filler neck for headlamp clean-
ing system and window washer system,
refer to page 62
3 Jump-starting connection, refer to
page 236
4 Filler neck for engine oil, refer to Adding
engine oil
Engine oil
The engine oil consumption is dependent on
driving style and driving conditions.
Checking oil level
Your car is equipped with an electronic oil-level
monitor.
For a precise measurement and display of the
oil level, it is necessary that the engine be at
operating temperature, i.e. after uninterrupted
driving for at least approx. 6.5 miles/10 km. You
can have the oil level displayed while you are
driving, or while the vehicle is at a standstill on a
level surface and the engine is running.
Display in the instrument cluster
1. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up
or down repeatedly until the appropriate
symbol is shown in the display, accompa-
nied by the word "OIL".
2. Press button 2 in the turn indicator lever.
The oil level is checked and the reading dis-
played.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Mobility
223
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Possible displays
1 Oil level OK
2 Oil level is being checked.
This can take about 3 minutes if the car is at
a standstill on a level surface, or about
5 minutes while the car is on the move.
3 Oil level down to minimum:
Add engine oil as soon as possible, but no
more than 1 US quart/1 liter, refer also to
Adding engine oil on page 224.
4 Oil level is too high.
Too much oil will harm the engine.
Have the vehicle checked without
delay.<
5 The oil level sensor is defective.
Do not add engine oil. You can continue
your journey. Note the newly calculated dis-
tance remaining to the next oil service, refer
to page 76. Have the system checked as
soon as possible.
Display via iDrive
iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.
1. Press the button.
This opens the start menu.
2. Press the controller to open the menu.
3. Select "Info sources" and press the control-
ler.
4. Select "Service Info" and press the control-
ler.
5. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Service requirements" is selected and
press the controller.
6. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the second field from the top. Turn the con-
troller until "Engine oil level" is selected and
press the controller. The oil level is dis-
played.
Possible messages
> "Engine oil level O.K."
> "No measurement available: Updating
engine oil level measurement..."
The engine oil level is measured. This can
take about 3 minutes if the car is at a stand-
still on a level surface and the engine is run-
ning, and about 5 minutes while the car is on
the move.
> "Oil level at the minimum! Refill with 1 quart
of engine oil."
Add engine oil as soon as possible, but no
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Under the hood
224
more than 1 US quart/1 liter, refer also to
Adding engine oil below.
> "Engine oil level too high"
Too much oil will harm the engine.
Have the vehicle checked without
delay.<
> "Please observe recalculated service inter-
val for engine oil"
Do not add engine oil. You can continue
your journey. Note the newly calculated dis-
tance remaining to the next oil service, refer
to page 76. Have the system checked as
soon as possible.
Adding engine oil
Do not add 1 US quart/1 liter of engine oil until a
corresponding message is shown on the Con-
trol Display.
Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km,
otherwise the engine could be dam-
aged.<
Keep oils, greases, etc. out of the reach of
children and comply with the relevant
warnings on the containers. Otherwise, health
hazards may result.<
Oil change
Have oil changed only at your BMW center or at
a workshop that works according to BMW
repair procedures with correspondingly trained
personnel.
Specified engine oils
The quality of the engine oil selected has critical
significance for the operation and service life of
an engine. BMW continuously approves spe-
cific oils after confirming their suitability for use
in its vehicles with extensive testing.
Do not use oil additives as these may
cause engine damage.<
Only use approved BMW High Performance
Synthetic Oil.
If BMW High Performance Synthetic Oil is not
available, you can add small quantities of other
synthetic oils in between oil changes. Only use
oils with the API SM specification or higher.
Your BMW center will be glad to answer
any questions regarding BMW High Per-
formance Synthetic Oil or approved synthetic
oils.<
You can also call BMW of North America at
1-800-831-1117 or visit the website
www.bmwusa.com to obtain this information.
Viscosity ratings
Viscosity is a measure of an oil's flow rating and
is categorized in SAE classes.
Selecting the appropriate SAE class depends
on the regional climatic conditions in which you
normally drive your BMW.
Approved oils belong to the 5W-40 and
5W-30 classes.<
These oils can be used for driving at all outside
temperatures.
Coolant
Do not add coolant to the cooling system
when the engine is hot. Escaping coolant
can cause burns.<
Coolant consists of half water and half additive.
Not all commercially available additives are suit-
able for your BMW. Ask your BMW center for
suitable additives.
Only use suitable additives, otherwise
engine damage may result. Because
additives are harmful to your health, it is impor-
tant to follow the instructions on the contain-
ers.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Mobility
225
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Comply with the appropriate environ-
mental protection regulations when dis-
posing of coolant additives.<
Checking coolant level
1. Do not open the engine hood before the
engine has cooled down.
2. Turn the cap of the expansion tank a little
counterclockwise to allow any accumulated
pressure to escape, then continue turning
to open.
3. The coolant level is correct if it is between
the maximum and minimum marks in the
filler neck, refer also to the diagram next to
the filler neck.
4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to
the specified level; do not overfill.
5. Turn the cap until there is an audible click.
6. Have the reason for the coolant loss elimi-
nated as soon as possible.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Maintenance
226
Maintenance
BMW Maintenance System
The BMW Maintenance System supports the
preservation of the traffic and operating safety
of your BMW. The objective is to optimize
efforts with respect to minimal vehicle mainte-
nance costs.
If and when you come to sell your BMW, a com-
prehensive record of servicing will prove a sig-
nificant benefit.
CBS Condition Based Service
Sensors and special algorithms take the differ-
ent driving conditions of your BMW into
account. Condition Based Service uses this to
determine the current and future service
requirements. By letting you define a service
and maintenance regimen that reflects your
own individual requirements, the system builds
the basis for trouble-free driving.
On the Control Display, you can have the
remaining times or distances for selected main-
tenance tasks and any legally prescribed dates
displayed, refer to page 76:
> Engine oil
> Brake pads: separately for front and rear
> Brake fluid
> Vehicle check
> Legally mandated inspections depending
on local regulations
Service data in the remote control
Your vehicle continuously stores service-
requirement information in the remote control
while you are driving. Your BMW Service Advi-
sor can read out this data from the remote con-
trol unit, and propose an optimized mainte-
nance approach. Whenever you take your car in
for servicing you should therefore hand your
BMW Service Advisor the remote control unit
that you last used.
Make sure that the date is always set cor-
rectly, refer to page 80; otherwise the
effectiveness of Condition Based Service CBS
is not assured.<
Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models
for additional information on service require-
ments.
BMW recommends that you have service
and repair operations performed at your
BMW center.
Take the time to ensure that these service pro-
cedures are confirmed by entries in your vehi-
cle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models and Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian models. These entries
verify that your vehicle has received the speci-
fied regular maintenance.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Mobility
227
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Socket for On-Board
Diagnosis OBD
Primary components that make up exhaust
emissions can be checked by a device via the
OBD socket.
This socket is located on the driver's side to the
left, on the bottom of the instrument panel
underneath a cover.
Exhaust emission values
The warning lamp lights up:
The exhaust emission values have
worsened. Have the car checked as
soon as possible.
Canadian models display this warning
lamp.
The lamp flashes under certain conditions. This
indicates excessive misfiring in the engine. If
this happens, you should reduce your speed
and visit your nearest BMW center as soon as
possible. Severe engine misfiring can quickly
lead to serious damage of emissions-related
components, especially the catalytic converter.
The warning lamp comes on if the gas
cap is not properly tightened and the
OBD system assumes that fuel vapor
is escaping. If the gas cap is then tightened, the
warning lamp should go out within a few days.
Event data recorders
Your vehicle may be equipped with one or sev-
eral measuring or diagnostic modules or a
device for recording or sending certain vehicle
data or information. In addition, if you have
signed a service contract for BMW Assist, cer-
tain vehicle data may be transmitted or
recorded in order to facilitate the corresponding
services.
Care
Important information on the care and mainte-
nance of your BMW is contained in the Caring
for your vehicle brochure.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Replacing components
228
Replacing components
Onboard tool kit
Sedan
The onboard tool kit is stored in a compartment
on the right-hand side of the cargo bay.
Remove the cover.
Sports Wagon
The onboard tool kit is stored in a compartment
on the left-hand side underneath the cargo bay
floor panel.
Wiper blades
1. Fold up the wiper arm.
2. Remove the cover. To do so, press the hook
on the bottom, see arrow.
3. Fold the wiper blade upwards.
4. Remove the wiper blade in the direction of
the windshield, see arrow.
To avoid damage, make sure that the
wiper arms are against the windshield
before you open the engine compartment.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Mobility
229
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Sports Wagon: changing rear wiper
blade
1. Fold up the wiper arm.
2. Pull off the wiper blade, see arrow.
3. Insert the new wiper blade and press it on
until it audibly engages.
Lamps and bulbs
Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribu-
tion to vehicle safety. They should, therefore,
be handled carefully. BMW recommends hav-
ing your BMW center perform any work that you
do not feel competent to perform yourself or
that is not described here.
Never touch the glass of new bulbs with
your bare fingers, as even minute
amounts of contamination will burn into the
bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a
clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or hold
the bulb by its base.<
You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs
at your BMW center.
Only change bulbs while they are cool to
the touch, otherwise you could suffer
burns.<
When working on electrical systems,
always begin by switching off the con-
sumer in question, otherwise short-circuits
could result. To avoid possible injury or equip-
ment damage when replacing bulbs, observe
any instructions provided by the bulb manufac-
turer.<
For care and maintenance of the headlamps,
please follow the instructions in the separate
Caring for your vehicle brochure.
If the routine for changing a particular
bulb is not described here, please contact
your BMW center or a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
respondingly trained personnel.<
Light-emitting diodes LED
Light-emitting diodes installed behind translu-
cent lenses serve as the light source for many of
the controls and displays in your vehicle. These
light-emitting diodes, which operate using a
concept similar to that applied in conventional
lasers, are officially designated as Class 1 light-
emitting diodes.
Do not remove the covers or expose the
eyes directly to the unfiltered light source
for several hours, otherwise this could cause
irritation to the retina.<
Xenon lamps*
These bulbs have a very long service life and are
highly unlikely to fail. If a xenon lamp fails never-
theless, switch on the fog lamps and continue
the journey with great care, provided that local
legislation does not prohibit this.
Have any work on the xenon lamp system,
including bulb replacements, performed
only by a BMW center or a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
respondingly trained personnel. Otherwise, if
such work is carried out improperly, the high
voltage in the system presents the danger of
fatal injuries.<
Parking lamps, roadside parking lamps
In the event of a malfunction, please contact
your BMW center or a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
respondingly trained personnel.
Halogen lamps
H7 bulb, 55 watts
Always wear gloves and eye protection;
the atmosphere within the H7 bulb is
pressurized. Otherwise there is a risk of injury if
the bulb is damaged.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Replacing components
230
There are separate headlamp covers for low-
beam headlamps and high-beam headlamps.
Be careful when installing the covers, oth-
erwise leaks could occur and cause dam-
age to the headlamp system.<
For checking and adjusting headlamp
aim, please contact your BMW center.<
Access to the lamps
The high-beam headlamp can be accessed
from the engine compartment, whereas the
low-beam headlamp is accessed through a flap
in the wheel well.
1 Cover for high-beam headlamp
2 Cover for low-beam headlamp
3 Turn signal bulb socket
To remove the covers:
1. Fold the respective wire bracket to the side,
see arrows.
2. Flip open the cover and take it out of the
guide.
Follow the same steps in reverse order to reat-
tach the covers.
Access through the wheel well
Only for low-beam headlamps and turn signals:
1. Turn the wheel inwards.
2. Open the flap in the wheel well. To do so,
turn the fastener counterclockwise using a
coin, for example.
Changing low-beam and high-beam
bulbs
1. Remove the relevant cover for the head-
lamp.
2. Disconnect the plug from the lamp.
3. Push the wire bracket to the side out of the
mounting, arrow 1, and fold it down,
arrow 2.
4. Remove the bulb.
5. Insert new bulb as shown in the detail of the
illustration above.
6. Fold up the wire bracket and engage it.
7. Connect the plug.
8. Reattach the cover.
Parking lamps, roadside parking lamps
5-watt bulb, W5W
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Mobility
231
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
1. Remove the cover for the high-beam head-
lamp.
2. Pull out the bulb socket, see arrow.
3. Remove and replace the bulb.
4. Insert bulb socket.
5. Reattach the cover.
Turn signals, front
21-watt bulb, PY21W
or PY21W Silver Vision
1. Open the flap in the wheel well, refer to
Access through the wheel well on
page 230.
2. Rotate turn signal bulb socket 1 to the left
and remove.
3. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and replace-
ment.
4. Insert turn signal bulb socket 1.
5. Attach the flap to the wheel well.
Tail lamps
Sedan
> Brake lamp in the luggage compartment lid:
H21W bulb, 21 watts
> Other lamps:
P21W bulb, 21 watts
The tail lamps are divided in two parts. One part
is in the luggage compartment lid, the other is in
the fender.
1 Brake lamp
2 Roadside parking lamp/tail lamp
3 Turn signal
4 Backup lamp
5 Tail lamp
6 Brake lamp
Sports Wagon
> Brake lamp in the tailgate:
H21W bulb, 21 watts
> Other lamps:
P21W bulb, 21 watts
The tail lamps are divided in two parts. One part
is in the tailgate, the other is in the fender.
1 Brake lamp
2 Roadside parking lamp/tail lamp
3 Turn signal
4 Backup lamp
5 Tail lamp
6 Brake lamp
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Replacing components
232
Fender-mounted lamps
Sedan
1. Using a screwdriver, pry off the cover in the
cargo bay or release the turn-lock fastener
by turning it counterclockwise and remove
the cover.
2. Loosen the bulb holder at the clip, see
arrow, and pull out.
3. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and replace-
ment.
4. Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audibly
clicks into place.
5. Reattach the cover in the cargo bay.
Sports Wagon
1. Left-hand lamps:
Open the flap on the left-hand side of the
cargo bay.
Right-hand lamps:
Open the cargo bay floor panel. Turn the
screws on the cover, arrows 1, 90° and take
out the cover, arrow 2.
2. Loosen the bulb holder at the clip, see
arrow, and pull out.
3. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and replace-
ment.
4. Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audibly
clicks into place.
5. Reattach the cover in the cargo bay.
Lamps in the luggage compartment lid/
tailgate
Sedan
1. Pry out the plastic plugs in the trim of the
luggage compartment lid using a screw-
driver and remove the trim.
2. Unfasten the bulb holder at the clip, see
arrow, and remove.
3. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and replace-
ment.
4. Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audibly
clicks into place.
5. Reattach the trim of the luggage compart-
ment lid.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Mobility
233
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Sports Wagon
1. Use a screwdriver to press out the cover at
the clips, see arrows, and fold it downward.
2. Fold away the foam insulating material.
3. Release the bulb holder at the clip, see
arrow, and remove.
4. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and replace-
ment.
5. Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audibly
clicks into place.
6. Reattach the trim of the tailgate.
License plate lamp and center brake
lamp
These lamps use LED technology for operation.
In the event of a malfunction, please contact
your BMW center or a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
respondingly trained personnel.
Changing wheels
Your BMW is equipped with Run-Flat Tires as
standard. This removes the need to change a
wheel immediately in the event of a puncture.
For information on continuing to drive with a
damaged tire, refer to Indication of a flat tire on
page 90.
The symbol identifying Run-Flat Tires is a circle
with the letters RSC on the sidewall, refer to
Run-Flat Tires, page 219.
When mounting new tires or changing over
from summer to winter tires and vice versa,
mount Run-Flat Tires for your own safety. In the
event of a flat, no spare wheel is available. Your
BMW center will be glad to advise you. Refer
also to New wheels and tires, page 219.
The tools for changing wheels are avail-
able as optional accessories from your
BMW center.<
Jack mounting points
The jacking points are at the positions shown in
the illustration.
Vehicle battery
Battery care
The battery is 100% maintenance-free, the
electrolyte will last for the life of the battery
when the vehicle is operated in a temperate cli-
mate. Your BMW center will be glad to advise in
all matters concerning the battery.
Charging the battery
Only charge the battery in the vehicle via the
terminals in the engine compartment with the
engine off. Connections, refer to Jump starting
on page 236.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Replacing components
234
Disposal
Have old batteries disposed of by your
BMW center or hand them in to a recy-
cling center. Maintain the battery in an upright
position for transport and storage. Always
secure the battery against tipping over during
transport.<
Power failure
After a temporary power loss, the functioning of
some equipment may be limited and require
reinitialization. Individual settings may likewise
have been lost and will have to be programmed:
> Time and date
These values must be updated, refer to
page 79.
> Radio
In some cases, stations may have to be
stored again, refer to page 162.
> Navigation system
Operability must be waited for, refer to
page 128.
> Glass roof
It may happen that the roof can only be
raised. The system must be initialized.
Please contact your BMW center.
> Panorama glass roof
It may happen that the roof can only be
raised. The system must be initialized.
Please contact your BMW center.
> Seat and mirror memory
The positions must be stored again, refer to
page 47.
> Inside rearview mirror with digital compass
The system must be calibrated, refer to
page 108.
Fuses
Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and
do not replace a defective fuse with a sub-
stitute of another color or amperage rating, oth-
erwise this could lead to a circuit overload, ulti-
mately resulting in a fire in the vehicle.<
Open the cover in the glove compartment and
remove it.
Spare fuses and a pair of plastic forceps are set
in holders on the distributor box.
See the rear of the cover for information on fuse
assignment.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Mobility
235
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Giving and receiving assistance
Emergency Request*
Conditions for an Emergency Request:
> Equipment version with full preparation
package mobile phone. This equipment
makes it possible to send an Emergency
Request even if no mobile phone is paired
with the vehicle.
> BMW Assist is activated. Activating
BMW Assist, refer to page 202.
> Radio readiness is on.
> The BMW Assist system is logged on to a
mobile phone network.
> The Emergency Request system is opera-
ble.
Once your service contract for BMW Assist
expires, the BMW Assist system can be deacti-
vated by a BMW center without you having to
visit a workshop. Once the BMW Assist system
has been deactivated, Emergency Requests
are not possible. The BMW Assist system can
be reactivated by a BMW center after a new
contract has been signed.
Sending an Emergency Request
1. Briefly press the cover flap to open.
2. Press the SOS button for at least
2seconds.
The LED in the button lights up. As soon as the
voice connection to the BMW Assist Response
Center has been established, the LED flashes.
Once the BMW Assist Response Center has
received your Emergency Request, the
BMW Assist Response Center contacts you
and takes further steps to help you. Even if you
are unable to respond, the BMW Assist
Response Center will be able to initiate further
steps to assist you under certain conditions.
If the circumstances allow this, remain in the
vehicle until the connection has been estab-
lished. You will then be able to provide a
detailed description of the situation.
If the current location of your vehicle can be
determined, it will be transmitted to the BMW
Assist Response Center.
If the LED is flashing but the BMW Assist
Response Center cannot be heard over the
hands-free system, it is possible that the
hands-free system is malfunctioning. You may
still be heard by the BMW Assist Response
Center, however.
Under certain conditions, an Emergency
Request is sent automatically immediately after
a severe accident. This Automatic Collision
Notification is not affected by the button being
pressed.
For technical reasons, the Emergency
Request service cannot be guaranteed
for the most unfavorable conditions.<
Roadside Assistance
The BMW Roadside Assistance is there to
assist you around the clock in the event of a
breakdown, including on weekends and public
holidays.
The phone numbers of the Roadside Assis-
tance in your home country can be found in the
Contact brochure.
In vehicles equipped with BMW Assist, you can
establish contact with BMW Roadside Assis-
tance for breakdown assistance directly via
iDrive, refer to page 198.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Giving and receiving assistance
236
First aid pouch*
Some of the articles contained in the first aid
pouch have a limited service life. Therefore,
check the expiration dates of the contents reg-
ularly and replace any items in good time, if nec-
essary.
Sedan
The first aid pouch is located on the right-hand
side of the cargo bay in a storage area.
Sports Wagon
The first aid pouch is located in the cargo bay
behind the left-hand trim panel.
Warning triangle*
Sedan
The warning triangle is located on the left-hand
side of the cargo bay. Press the tab to take it
out.
Sports Wagon
The warning triangle is located behind the left-
hand trim panel in the cargo bay. Press the tab
to take it out.
Jump starting
If the car's own battery is flat, your BMW's
engine can be started by connecting two
jumper cables to another vehicle's battery. You
can also use the same method to help start
another vehicle. Only use jumper cables with
fully-insulated clamp handles.
Do not touch any electrically live parts
when the engine is running, or a fatal acci-
dent may occur. Carefully adhere to the follow-
ing sequence, both to prevent damage to one or
both vehicles, and to guard against possible
personal injuries.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Mobility
237
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Preparation
1. Check whether the battery of the other
vehicle has a voltage of 12 volts and
approximately the same capacitance in Ah.
This information can be found on the bat-
tery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi-
cle.
3. Switch off any consumers in both vehicles.
There must not be any contact between
the bodies of the two vehicles, otherwise
there is a danger of shorting.<
Connecting jumper cables
Connect the jumper cables in the correct
order, so that no sparks which could
cause injury occur.<
Your BMW has a jump-starting connection in
the engine compartment which acts as the bat-
tery's positive terminal, refer also to the Engine
compartment overview on page 222. The cap is
marked with +.
1. Pull the cap of the BMW jump-starting con-
nection up to remove.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the plus/+
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery or a starting-aid terminal of the vehi-
cle providing assistance.
3. Attach the second terminal clamp of the
plus/+ jumper cable to the positive terminal
of the battery or a starting-aid terminal of
the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the minus/–
jumper cable to the negative terminal of the
battery or to an engine or body ground of
the assisting vehicle.
Your BMW has a special nut as body ground
or negative pole.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp of the
minus/– jumper cable to the negative termi-
nal of the battery or to the engine or body
ground of the vehicle to be started.
Starting the engine
1. Start the engine of the donor vehicle and
allow it to run for a few minutes at slightly
increased idle speed.
2. Start the engine on the other vehicle in the
usual way.
If the first start attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before another attempt
in order to allow the discharged battery to
recharge.
3. Let the engines run for a few minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables by reversing
the above connecting sequence.
If necessary, have the battery checked and
recharged.
Never use spray fluids to start the
engine.<
Tow-starting, towing away
Observe the applicable laws and regula-
tions for tow-starting and towing vehi-
cles.<
Do not transport any passengers other
than the driver in a vehicle that is being
towed.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Giving and receiving assistance
238
Using a tow fitting
The screw-in tow fitting must always be carried
in the car. It can be screwed in at the front or
rear of the BMW.
Sedan: it is stored in the onboard tool kit under-
neath the cover on the right-hand side of the
cargo bay, refer to page 228.
Sports Wagon: it is stored in the onboard tool kit
underneath the cover on the left-hand side of
the cargo bay, refer to page 228.
Use only the tow fitting provided with the
vehicle and screw it all the way in. Use the
tow fitting for towing on paved roads only. Avoid
lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g. do not lift
the vehicle by the tow fitting. Otherwise the tow
fitting and the vehicle could be damaged.<
Access to screw thread
Rectangular cover panel in bumper:
Press on the upper edges of the cover panel.
Front
Rear
Being towed
Make sure that the ignition is switched on,
refer to page 56, otherwise the low-beam
headlamps, tail lamps, turn signal indicators and
windshield wipers may be unavailable.
Power steering assistance is not available when
the engine is not running. Thus, braking and
steering will require increased effort. Active
steering is not active and it will be necessary to
turn the steering wheel further.<
Switch on the hazard warning flashers, depend-
ing on local regulations.
Manual transmission
Gearshift lever in idle position.
Automatic transmission
Selector lever in position N.
Changing selector lever positions, refer to
page 59.
Do not exceed a towing speed of 45 mph
or 70 km/h and a towing distance of
90 miles/150 km, otherwise the automatic
transmission may be damaged.<
Towing methods
In some countries, it is illegal to tow your vehicle
with a tow bar or tow rope on public highways.
Please familiarize yourself with the relevant
towing regulations for the country in which you
are driving.
With a tow bar
The towing vehicle must not be lighter
than the towed vehicle, otherwise it may
be impossible to maintain control.<
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossi-
ble to avoid mounting the tow bar at an angle,
please observe the following:
> Clearance and maneuvering capability will
be sharply limited during cornering.
> The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is
attached offset.
Attach the tow bar to the tow fittings only,
as attaching it to other parts of the vehicle
could result in damage.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Mobility
239
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
With a tow rope
When starting off in the towing vehicle, make
sure that the tow rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated
stresses on vehicle components when
towing, always use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
Attach the tow rope to the tow fittings only, as
attaching it to other parts of the vehicle could
result in damage.<
With a tow truck: vehicle without xDrive
Have the BMW transported with a tow truck
with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.
Do not tow the vehicle with just the rear axle
raised as this may cause the steering to turn.
Do not lift the vehicle by a tow fitting or
body and chassis parts, otherwise dam-
age may result.<
With a tow truck: vehicle with xDrive
Do not tow a BMW with xDrive with just
the front or rear axle raised, otherwise the
wheels could lock up and the transfer case
could be damaged.<
Have the BMW transported on a flatbed surface
only.
Tow-starting
Avoid tow-starting the vehicle whenever possi-
ble; instead, jump-start the engine, refer to
page 236. Vehicles with a catalytic converter
should only be tow-started when the engine is
cold, vehicles with an automatic transmission
cannot be tow-started at all.
1. Switch on hazard warning flashers, comply
with local regulations.
2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 56.
3. Shift into 3rd gear.
4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the clutch
depressed and slowly release the clutch.
After the engine starts, immediately
depress the clutch completely again.
5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow
bar or rope and switch off the hazard warn-
ing flashers.
6. Have the vehicle checked.
With xDrive: do not activate Hill Descent
Control HDC when the vehicle is being
tow-started, page 87.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
This chapter contains technical data, short
commands for the voice command system and
an index that will help you find information most
quickly.
Reference
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Technical data
242
Technical data
Engine data
Sedan
Sports Wagon
323i (Canada) 328i/xi 335i/xi
Displacement cu in/cmμ 152.4/2,497 182.8/2,996 181.8/2,979
Number of cylinders 666
Maximum power output hp 200 230 300
at engine speed rpm 6,000 6,500 5,800
Maximum torque lb ft/Nm 180/244 200/270 300/407
at engine speed rpm 4,000 - 5,000 2,750 1,400 - 5,000
328i/xi
Displacement cu in/cmμ 182.8/2,996
Number of cylinders 6
Maximum power output hp 230
at engine speed rpm 6,500
Maximum torque lb ft/Nm 200/270
at engine speed rpm 2,750
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Technical data
244
Sports Wagon
All dimensions given in inches/mm.
Smallest turning circle diam.: 36 ft 1 in/11.0 m, with xDrive: 38 ft 9 in/11.8 m.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
245
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Weights
Sedan
Never exceed either the approved axle loads or
the gross vehicle weight.
323i (Canada) 328i 328xi
Curb weight
> with manual transmission lbs/kg 3,274/1,485 3,340/1,515 3,582/1,625
> with automatic transmission lbs/kg 3,329/1,510 3,406/1,545 3,627/1,645
Approved gross weight
> with manual transmission lbs/kg 4,332/1,965 4,398/1,995 4,641/2,105
> with automatic transmission lbs/kg 4,387/1,990 4,464/2,025 4,685/2,125
Load lbs/kg 1,058/480 1,058/480 1,058/480
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,083/945 2,116/960 2,293/1,040
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,403/1,090 2,458/1,115 2,502/1,135
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75 165/75 165/75
Cargo bay capacity cu ft/l 16.2/460 16.2/460 16.2/460
335i 335xi
Curb weight
> with manual transmission lbs/kg 3,593/1,630 3,814/1,730
> with automatic transmission lbs/kg 3,605/1,635 3,824/1,735
Approved gross weight
> with manual transmission lbs/kg 4,652/2,110 4,872/2,210
> with automatic transmission lbs/kg 4,663/2,115 4,883/2,215
Load lbs/kg 1,058/480 1,058/480
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,238/1,015 2,436/1,105
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,531/1,145 2,546/1,155
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75 165/75
Cargo bay capacity cu ft/l 15.9/450 15.9/450
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Technical data
246
Sports Wagon
Never exceed either the approved axle loads or
the gross vehicle weight.
Capacities
328i 328xi
Curb weight
> with manual transmission lbs/kg 3,527/1,600 3,770/1,710
> with automatic transmission lbs/kg 3,593/1,630 3,814/1,730
Approved gross weight
> with manual transmission lbs/kg 4,630/2,100 4,872/2,210
> with automatic transmission lbs/kg 4,696/2,130 4,916/2,230
Load lbs/kg 1,102/500 1,102/500
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,127/965 2,326/1,055
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,646/1,200 2,646/1,200
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75 165/75
Cargo bay capacity cu ft/l 16.2/460 - 48.9/1,385 16.2/460 - 48.9/1,385
Notes
Fuel tank US gal/liters approx. 16.1/61 Fuel grade: page 207
including reserve of US gal/liters approx. 2.1/8.0
Window washer system For more details: page 62
including headlamp washers US quarts/liters approx. 6.3/6.0
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
247
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Short commands for the voice command
system
With short commands you can carry out certain
functions directly, regardless of which menu
item is selected. Here are the important short
commands for the voice command system.
Assistance window
Communication
*
Function Command
To open assistance window 20 {Assistance window}
To select display in the assistance window 20 {Assistance window map facing north},
{Assistance window map direction of travel},
{Assistance window arrow display},
{Assistance window perspective},
{Assistance window current position},
{Assistance window trip computer} or
{Assistance window onboard info}
To change the scale in the assistance
window 145
{Assistance window scale ... feet} or
{Assistance window scale ... miles}
Function Command
To open phone 189 {Phone}
To dial phone number 189 {Dial number}
To display phone book 189 {A to Z}
To select from phone book 189 {Call ...} or
{Dial name}
To display "Top 8" 189 {Top 8}
Redialing 189 {Redial}
To display "Received calls" 189 {Received calls}
To display "Missed calls" 189 {Missed calls}
To display "Bluetooth" 183 {Bluetooth}
To open BMW Assist 202 {BMW Assist}
To open "BMW Service" services 198 {BMW Service}
To open "BMW Contact" 191 {BMW Contact}
To open "BMW Contact Numbers" 191 {BMW Contact numbers}
To open "Roadside Assistance" 198 {Roadside Assistance}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Short commands for the voice command system
248
Navigation
Onboard info
Function Command
To open navigation 136 {Navigation}
To display current position 151 {Current position}
To open "Enter address" 130 {Enter address}
To open "New destination" 130 {New destination}
To display "Input map" 135 {Input map}
To open "Information" 136 {Info menu}
To display address book 138 {Address book} or
{From address book}
To display destination list 137 {Destination list}
To switch on destination guidance 143 {Start guidance}
To switch off destination guidance 143 {Stop guidance}
To display route criteria 141 {Route preference}
To switch on voice instructions 146 {Navigation info on}
To switch off voice instructions 146 {Navigation info off}
To repeat voice instructions 147 {Repeat navigation info}
To show arrow display 144 {Arrow display}
To display map 145 {Map}, {Map facing north},
{Map direction of travel} or
{Perspective}
To open route 132, 147
{Route menu}
To open "New route" 147 {New route}
To change scale 145 {Scale ... miles} or
{Scale ... feet}
To display towns/cities and streets along the
route 146
{Route list}
Function Command
To open "Car Data" 73 {Car Data}
To display computer 73 {Onboard info}
To display trip computer 74 {Trip computer}
To open speed limit 83 {Limit}
To open stopwatch 83 {Stopwatch}
To activate road-speed limit 83 {Limit on}
To deactivate road-speed limit 83 {Limit off}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
249
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Entertainment
Function Command
Tone control 157 {Audio}
To switch on radio 160 {Radio on},
{FM} or
{AM}
To open "FM" 160 {FM menu}
To open "AM" 160 {AM menu}
To open "All stations" 160 {FM All stations}
To select radio station 160 {Station} e.g. {Station WNYC} or
{Choose station}
To open "Presets" 160 {FM presets} or
{AM presets}
To open "Manual" 161 {FM manual} or
{AM manual} or
{Choose frequency},
{Frequency ... Megahertz}
To select preset radio station 162 {Preset ...}
e.g. {Preset 1}
To open strongest radio stations 161 {AM Autostore}
To open "SAT" 167 {SAT radio menu}
To switch on satellite radio 167 {SAT radio}
To open "Presets" of the satellite radio 168 {SAT radio presets}
To open "All channels" of the satellite radio 167 {SAT radio all channels}
To open "Categories" of the satellite radio 167 {SAT radio categories}
To open CD player 169 {CD menu}
To switch on CD player 169 {CD}
To open CD changer 169 {CD changer menu}
To switch on CD changer 169 {CD changer}
To select a CD in the CD changer 169 {CD 1...6}
To select track 170 {CD track ...}
To select a CD and track in the CD changer 170 {CD 1...6 track ...}
To select track 170 {Track ...}
To open DVD 169 {DVD player menu}
To switch on DVD 169 {DVD player}
To select music track on DVD 170 {DVD track ...}
To start sound output for external audio
device 175
{Audio Aux on}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Short commands for the voice command system
250
Climate
Menu
Function Command
To open "Vent settings" 101 {Vent settings}
To open "Automatic programs" 102 {Automatic programs}
Function Command
To open the menu {Settings menu}
"Display off" 21 {Display off}
To open "Info sources" {Info sources}
To open "Settings" {Settings}
To open "Door locks" 29, 32 {Door locks}
To open "Steering wheel buttons" 50 {Steering wheel buttons}
To open "Lighting" 61 {Lighting}
To open "BMW Service" 198 {BMW Service}
To open "Service requirements" 77, 197 {Service requirements}
To open "Service" 77, 197 {Service}
To display "Check Control messages" 81 {Check Control messages}
To set brightness of Control Display 84 {Brightness}
To open "Units" 71 {Units}
To open "Language" 84, 146 {Languages}
To open "Time" 79 {Time}
To open "Date" 80 {Date}
To open "PDC" 85 {PDC}
To open "FTM" 89 {FTM}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Everything from A-Z
252
Everything from A-Z
Index
"..." Identifies Control Display
texts used to select
individual functions and
refers you to the page where
these texts can be found.
A
ABS Antilock Brake
System 86
ACC, refer to Active cruise
control 64
Accident, refer to Sending an
Emergency Request 235
Activated-charcoal filter for
automatic climate
control 104
"Activation time" 104
Active cruise control 64
– indicator lamps 67
– malfunction 68
– selecting distance 66
– sensor 68
Active steering 93
– warning lamp 93
Adaptive Head Light 98
"Add digits" for mobile
phone 190
Additives
– coolant 224
"Address book" in
navigation 138
Address for navigation
– deleting 140
– entering 130, 138
– selecting 139
– storing 138
– storing current position 139
"Add to destination
list" 133, 135
Adjusting temperature inside
the car, refer to Automatic
climate control 101
Adjusting the thigh support 44
Adjusting the tone during
audio operation, refer to
Tone control 157
Airbags 94
– indicator/warning lamp 95
– sitting safely 43
Air conditioning mode
– automatic climate
control 101
– ventilation 103
Air distribution
– automatic 102
– individual 101
Air flow rate 102
Airing, refer to Ventilation 103
Air pressure, refer to Tire
inflation pressure 208
Air recirculation, refer to
Recirculated-air mode 102
"Air recirculation on / off" 51
Air supply
– automatic climate
control 101
– ventilation 103
Air vents 100
AKI, refer to Fuel
specifications 207
Alarm system 35
– avoiding unintentional
alarms 36
– interior motion sensor 36
– switching off an alarm 36
– tilt alarm sensor 36
"All channels" for satellite
radio 167
All-season tires, refer to
Winter tires 220
"All stations", displaying with
the radio 160
All-wheel drive, refer to
xDrive 87
"AM", waveband 156, 160
Ambient air, refer to
Recirculated-air mode 102
Antenna for mobile phone 182
Antifreeze
– coolant 224
– washer fluid 62
Anti-theft alarm system, refer
to Alarm system 35
Anti-theft system 29
Approved axle loads, refer to
Weights 245
Approved gross vehicle
weight, refer to Weights 245
Armrest, refer to Center
armrest 110
Arrival time, refer to
Computer 73
Arrival time, refer to Starting
destination guidance 143
Arrow display for
navigation 144
"Arrow display" in
navigation 144
Ashtray
– front 111
– rear 112
Assistance systems, refer to
Driving stability control
systems 86
Assistance window 20
– refer to iDrive 20
AUC Automatic recirculated-
air control 102
"Audio" 159, 163
Audio 156
– controls 156
– switching on/off 156
– tone control 157
– volume 157
"Audio", refer to Tone
control 157
Audio device, external 110
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
253
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Automatic
– air distribution 102
– air flow rate 102
– cruise control 63, 64
– headlamp control 96
– service notification 199
– storing of stations 161
Automatic climate control 100
– automatic air
distribution 102
– settings via iDrive 101
Automatic curb monitor 49
"Automatic programs" with
automatic climate
control 102
Automatic recirculated-air
control AUC 102
Automatic station search 161
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic 58
– interlock 58, 59
– overriding selector lever
lock 60
– shiftlock, refer to Changing
selector lever position 59
– sport program 59
– towing 237
– tow-starting 237
"Automatic ventilation" 104
AUTO program for automatic
climate control 102
"Auto Request" 199
"Autostore"
– on the radio 162
"AUX" 156, 175, 177
– AUX-In port 175
– USB-audio interface 176
AUX-IN
– port 110
AUX-In port 175
Average fuel consumption 73
– setting the units 76
Average speed 73
"Avoid ferries" in
navigation 141
"Avoid highways" in
navigation 141
Avoid highways in
navigation 141
Avoiding unintentional
alarms 36
"Avoid tollroads" in
navigation 141
Axle loads, refer to
Weights 245
"A - Z" 189
, 190
B
Backrest contour, refer to
Lumbar support 45
Backrests, refer to Seat
adjustment 44
Backrest width adjustment 45
Back seats
– refer to Rear seats 46
Backup lamps
– replacing bulb 232
Backup lamps, refer to Tail
lamps 231
Balance, tone control 157
Band-aids, refer to First-aid
pouch 236
Bar, refer to Towing
methods 238
Base plate for telephone or
mobile phone
– refer to Snap-in adapter in
the center armrest storage
compartment 110
Bass, tone control 157
Bass sounds, refer to Treble
and bass 157
Battery 233
– charging 233
– disposal 38, 234
– jump starting 236
– remote control 28
– temporary power failure 234
Battery renewal
– remote control 38
– remote control for vehicle 38
Being towed 238
Belts, refer to Safety belts 48
Belt tensioner, refer to Safety
belts 48
Beverage holders, refer to
Cup holders 111
Blower, refer to Air flow
rate 102
Bluetooth, refer to separate
Owner's Manual
"BMW Assist" 198, 199, 200
BMW Assist
– activating 202
– Concierge service 200
– contacting BMW Customer
Relations 200
– Roadside Assistance 198
– services offered 197
– TeleService 199
"BMW Contact" 192
"BMW Contact
Numbers" 192
BMW Homepage 4
BMW Maintenance
System 226
"BMW Service settings" 203
BMW webpage 4
Bottle holders, refer to Cup
holders 111
Brake assist, refer to Dynamic
Brake Control DBC 86
Brake fluid, refer to Service
requirements 76
Brake Force Display 93
Brake lamps
– replacing bulb 232
– two-stage 93
Brake pads 120
– breaking in 120
Brake rotors 122
– brakes 120
– breaking in 120
Brakes
– ABS 86
– BMW Maintenance
System 226
– breaking in 120
– parking brake 57
– service requirements 76
Brakes, refer to Braking
safely 122
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Everything from A-Z
254
Brake system 120
– BMW Maintenance
System 226
– breaking in 120
– disc brakes 122
Breakdown services, refer to
Roadside Assistance 235
Breaking in the clutch 120
Breaking in the differential,
refer to Engine and
differential 120
Break-in period 120
Brightness of the Control
Display 84
"Brightness" on the Control
Display 84
Bulb changing, refer to Lamps
and bulbs 229
Button for starting the engine,
refer to Start/stop button 56
Buttons on the steering
wheel 11
C
California Proposition 65
warning 6
"Call" 190, 201
Call
– accepting 188
– displaying accepted 190
– ending 189
– missed 190
– starting 189
Calling
– from phone book 189
– from Top 8 list 190
– redialing 190
Can holders, refer to Cup
holders 111
Capacities 246
Capacity of the cargo bay 245
Car battery, refer to Vehicle
battery 233
Car care, refer to Caring for
your vehicle brochure
Car-care products, refer to
Caring for your vehicle
brochure
"Car Data" 73
Care, refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
Cargo, securing 124
Cargo bay 114
– capacity 245
– convenient access 37
– folding up the floor
panel 116
– lamp, refer to Interior
lamps 99
– opening from inside 33
– opening from outside 33
– partition net 114
– roll-up cover 114
Cargo bay lid, refer to
Luggage compartment lid/
tailgate 33
Cargo bay net, refer to
Partition net 114
Cargo loading
– securing cargo 124
– stowing cargo 123
– vehicle 123
Caring for artificial leather,
refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
Caring for leather, refer to
Caring for your vehicle
brochure
Caring for plastic, refer to
Caring for your vehicle
brochure
Caring for the carpet, refer to
Caring for your vehicle
brochure
Caring for the vehicle finish,
refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
Car jack
– jacking points 233
Car key, refer to Integrated
key/remote control 28
Car phone 182
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest 110
– refer to Mobile phone 182
– refer to separate Owner's
Manual
Car radio, refer to Radio 160
Car wash 122
– also refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
– with convenient access 37
Catalytic converter, refer to
Hot exhaust system 121
"Categories" for satellite
radio 167
CBS Condition Based
Service 226
"CD" 156, 169
CD changer 169
– compressed audio files 169
– controls 156
– fast forward/reverse 173
– installation location 173
– playing a track 171
– random order 172
– repeating a track 172
– selecting a CD 169
– selecting a track 170
– switching on/off 156
– tone control 157
– volume 157
CD player 169
– compressed audio files 169
– controls 156
– fast forward/reverse 173
– playing a track 171
– random order 172
– repeating a track 172
– selecting a track 170
– switching on/off 156
– tone control 157
– volume 157
Center armrest 110
Center brake lamp
– replacing bulb 233
Center console, refer to
Around the center
console 14
"Central locking" 30
Central locking
– from inside 32
– from outside 29
Central locking system 29
– convenient access 36
– hotel function 34
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
255
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Changes, technical, refer to
For your own safety 5
Changing bulbs, refer to
Lamps and bulbs 229
Changing the language on the
Control Display 84
Changing the measurement
units on the Control
Display 76
Changing wheels 233
Chassis number, refer to
Engine compartment 222
Check Control 81
"Check Control
messages" 83
Check Gas Cap 206
Child-restraint fixing system
LATCH 53
Child-restraint systems 52
Child-safety lock 55
Child seats, refer to
Transporting children
safely 52
Chrome parts, care, refer to
Caring for your vehicle
brochure
Cigarette lighter, refer to
Lighter 111
Cleaning, refer to Caring for
your vehicle brochure
Cleaning headlamps 62
– washer fluid 62
"Climate" 101
Clock 71
– 12h/24h mode 80
– setting time 79
Closing
– from inside 32
– from outside 29
Clothes hooks 110
Cockpit 10
Cold start, refer to Starting the
engine 57
Combined instrument, refer to
Instrument cluster 12
Comfort access, refer to
Convenient access 36
Comfort area, refer to Around
the center console 14
"Communication" 188, 198, 1
99, 200
Compact disc, refer to
– CD changer 169
– CD player 169
Compartment for remote
control, refer to Ignition
lock 56
Compass 108
Computer 73
– displays on Control
Display 73
– hour signal 80
Computer, refer to iDrive 16
"Concert hall" for Tone
control 158
"Concierge" 200
Concierge service 200
Condensation, refer to When
the vehicle is parked 122
Condition Based Service
CBS 226
Configuring settings, refer to
Personal Profile 28
Confirmation signals for
locking/unlocking the
vehicle 31
Connecting vacuum cleaner,
refer to Connecting
electrical appliances 112
Consumption, refer to
Average consumption 73
Consumption display
– average consumption 73
– Energy Control 72
"Continue guidance to
destination?" 144
Control Center, refer to
iDrive 16
Control Display
– brightness 84
– changing the language 84
– switching off/on 21
Control Display, refer to
iDrive 16
Controller, refer to iDrive 16
Controls and displays 10
Control unit, refer to iDrive 16
Convenient access 36
– replacing the battery 38
– what to observe before
entering a car wash 37
Convenient operation
– glass roof 30
– windows 30
Coolant 224
– checking level 225
Coolant temperature 72
Cooling, maximum 102
Cooling fluid, refer to
Coolant 224
Cooling system, refer to
Coolant 224
Copyright 2
Corner-illuminating lamps,
refer to Adaptive Head
Light 98
Cornering lamps, refer to
Adaptive Head Light 98
Correct tires 219
Courtesy lamps, refer to
Interior lamps 99
Cross-hairs in navigation 135
Cruise control 63
– active 64
– malfunction 64
Cruising range 73
Cup holders 111
Curb weight, refer to
Weights 245
Current fuel consumption,
refer to Energy Control 72
"Current position" 151
Current position
– displaying 151
– entering 139
– storing 139
"Customer
Relations" 192, 200
D
Dashboard, refer to
Cockpit 10
Dashboard, refer to
Instrument cluster 12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Everything from A-Z
256
Dashboard lighting, refer to
Instrument lighting 99
Data, technical 242
– dimensions 243
– engine 242
– weights 245
"Date" 81
Date
– setting 80
– setting format 81
"Date format" 81
"Daytime running lamps" 97
Daytime running lamps 97
DBC Dynamic Brake
Control 86
"Deactivated" 48
Deactivating front passenger
airbags 94
Deadlocking, refer to
Locking 30
Decommissioning the vehicle,
refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
Defect
– door lock 31
– fuel filler door 206
– glass roof 40
– panorama glass roof 42
"Delete address book" in
navigation 140
"Delete all numbers" on the
mobile phone 191
"Delete data" in
navigation 140
"Delete" for mobile
phone 191
Destination address
– deleting 140
– entering 130, 134
Destination for navigation
– destination list 137
– entry 130
– home address 140
– manual entry 130, 134
– selecting from address
book 139
– selecting using
information 136
– selecting via language 134
– selecting via map 135
– storing 138
Destination guidance 143
– canceling voice
instructions 51
– changing specified
route 141
– displaying route 144
– distance and arrival 143
– starting 143
– terminating/continuing 143
– voice instructions 146
– volume of voice
instructions 147
Destination list for navigation
system 137
Destinations recently driven
to 137
"Details" for audio mode 177
"Dial" for mobile phone 189
"Dial number" 189
Digital clock 71
Digital compass 108
Digital radio, refer to High
Definition Radio 163
Dimensions 243
Directional indicators, refer to
Turn signals 60
Direction instructions, refer to
Voice instructions 146
Directory for navigation, refer
to Address book 138
Displacement, refer to Engine
data 242
Display, refer to iDrive
controls 16
Display lighting, refer to
Instrument lighting 99
"Display off" 21
Displays
– on the Control Display 16
Displays, refer to Instrument
cluster 12
Displays and controls 10
Disposal
– coolant 224
– remote control battery 38
– vehicle battery 234
Distance control, refer to
Active cruise control 64
Distance remaining to service,
refer to Service
requirements 76
"Distance to dest." 74
Distance warning, refer to
PDC Park Distance
Control 85
Door key, refer to Remote
control with integrated
key 28
Door lock 31
"Door locks" 30, 31, 32, 77
Doors, emergency
operation 31
DOT Quality Grades 217
Draft-free ventilation 103
Drinks holders, refer to Cup
holders 111
Drive-off assistance, refer to
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 86
Drive-off assistant 88
Driving around a traffic
congestion 150
Driving lamps, refer to Parking
lamps/low beams 96
Driving notes 120
Driving off on hills, refer to
Drive-off assistant 88
Driving route, refer to
Displaying route 144
Driving stability control
systems 86
Driving through water 122
Driving tips, refer to Driving
notes 120
Dry air, refer to Cooling
function 103
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
257
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control 86
DTC Dynamic Traction
Control 87
– indicator/warning lamp 87
DVD for navigation 128
Dynamic Brake Control
DBC 86
"Dynamic route" in
navigation 141
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC
– indicator/warning lamp 87
Dynamic Traction Control
DTC
– indicator/warning lamp 87
E
EBV Electronic brake-force
distribution 86
Eject button, refer to Buttons
on the CD player 156
Electrical malfunction
– door lock 31
– driver's door 31
– fuel filler door 206
– glass roof 40
– luggage compartment lid/
tailgate 33
– panorama glass roof 42
Electric seat adjustment 44
Electric steering wheel lock
– with convenient access 37
Electronic oil level check 222
Emergency actuation,
automatic transmission,
refer to Overriding selector
lever lock 60
Emergency operation
– fuel filler door, manual
release 206
Emergency operation, refer to
Closing manually
– glass roof 40
– panorama glass roof 42
Emergency operation, refer to
Manual operation
– door lock 31
Emergency release
– luggage compartment lid
from inside 34
Emergency Request 235
Emergency services, refer to
Roadside Assistance 235
"Enabled services" 202
"Enable services" 203
"End call" 189
Energy, saving
– saving fuel 120
Energy-conscious driving,
refer to Energy Control 72
Energy Control 72
Engine
– breaking in 120
– data 242
– overheated, refer to Coolant
temperature 72
– speed 242
– starting 57
– starting, convenient
access 36
– switching off 57
Engine compartment 222
Engine coolant, refer to
Coolant 224
Engine oil
– adding 224
– BMW Maintenance
System 226
– capacity 246
– checking level 222
– intervals between changes,
refer to Service
requirements 76
"Engine oil level" 223
Engine output, refer to Engine
data 242
Engine speed, refer to Engine
data 242
Engine starting, refer to
Starting the engine 57
"Enter address" 131
Entering a destination 131
Entering a destination
country 131
Entering a house number or
intersection 133
Entering an intersection 132
Entering a street 132
"Entertainment" 156
Entry lamps, refer to Interior
lamps 99
Environmentally friendly
driving, refer to Energy
Control 72
"Equalizer", refer to Tone
control 159
Equalizer, refer to Tone
control 158
Error messages, refer to
Check Control 81
"ESN" 166
ESP Electronic Stability
Program, refer to DSC
Dynamic Stability
Control 86
Event data recorders 227
Exhaust system, refer to Hot
exhaust system 121
Expanding the cargo bay 114
Exterior mirrors 49
– adjusting 49
– automatic dimming
feature 50
– automatic heating 49
– folding in and out 49
External audio device 110
External audio device, refer to
AUX-In port 175
Eyes
– for tow-starting and towing
away 238
– for tying down loads 124
F
Fader, tone control 157
Failure messages, refer to
Check Control 81
Failure of an electrical
consumer 234
False alarm
– avoiding unintentional
alarm 36
– switching off an alarm 36
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Everything from A-Z
258
Fastening safety belts, refer to
Safety belts 48
Fastest route for
navigation 141
Fast forward
– CD changer 173
– CD player 173
"Fast route" in navigation 141
Filter
– refer to Microfilter/activated-
charcoal filter for automatic
climate control 104
Fine wood, refer to Caring for
your vehicle brochure
First aid pouch 236
Fixture for remote control,
refer to Ignition lock 56
Flashlight, refer to LED hand
lamp 110
Flash when locking/
unlocking 31
Flat tire
– Run-Flat Tires 219
– Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 90
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 89
– indicating a flat tire 90
– indicator/warning lamp 90
– initializing the system 89
– malfunction 90
– snow chains 89, 220
– system limits 89
Flat tires, refer to Tire
condition 218
Floor mats, carpets, refer to
Caring for your vehicle
brochure
Fluid reservoir, refer to
Washer fluid reservoir 62
"FM", waveband 156, 160
FM, waveband 160
Fog lamps 98
– indicator lamp 13, 98
Folding in the mirrors, before
driving into a car wash 49
Folding rear seat backrest 114
Folding up the floor panel 116
Footbrake, refer to Braking
safely 122
Footwell lamps, refer to
Interior lamps 99
For your own safety 5
Four-wheel drive, refer to
xDrive 87
Frequency, selecting
manually 161
Front airbags 94
FTM, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 89
Fuel 207
– average consumption 73
– gauge 72
– high-quality brands 207
– quality 207
– specifications 207
– tank contents, refer to
Capacities 246
Fuel clock, refer to Fuel
gauge 72
Fuel display, refer to Fuel
gauge 72
Fuel-efficient driving, refer to
Energy Control 72
Fuel filler door 206
– releasing in the event of
electrical malfunction 206
Fuses 234
G
Garage door opener, refer to
Integrated universal remote
control 106
Gasoline
– refer to Average
consumption 73
Gasoline, refer to Required
fuel 207
Gasoline display, refer to Fuel
gauge 72
Gear indicator, automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 58
Gearshift lever
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 59
– manual transmission 58
Gearshifts
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 59
– manual transmission 58
General driving notes 121
Glass roof, electric 39
– closing after electrical
malfunction 40
– convenient operation 30, 31
– initializing 40
– opening, closing 39
– pinch protection system 40
– power failure 40
– raising 39
– remote control 30
Glove compartment 109
– LED hand lamp 110
GPS navigation, refer to
Navigation system 128
Grills 100
Gross vehicle weight, refer to
Weights 245
H
Halogen lamps
– replacing bulbs 229
Handbrake, refer to Parking
brake 57
Hand lamp, refer to LED hand
lamp 110
Hands-free system 14
Hazard warning flashers 14
HDC Hill Descent Control 87
"HD radio" 163
HD radio, refer to High
Definition Radio 163
Head airbags 94
Headlamp control,
automatic 96
Headlamp cover 229
Headlamp flasher 60
– indicator lamp 11, 13
Headlamps
– care, refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
– replacing bulbs 229
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
259
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Head restraints 45
– front, removing 46
– rear, removing 46
– sitting safely 43
Heated
– mirrors 49
– rear window 103
– seats 47
Heating
– mirrors 49
– rear window 103
– residual heat 103
– seats 47
Heating and ventilation, refer
to Climate 100
Heating while at a standstill,
refer to Using residual
heat 103
Heavy loads, refer to Stowing
cargo 123
Height, refer to
Dimensions 243
Height adjustment
– seats 44
– steering wheel 50
High beams 98
– headlamp flasher 98
– indicator lamp 13
– replacing bulbs 229
High Definition Radio 163
High water, refer to Driving
through water 122
Highways, refer to Route
criteria 141
Hill Descent Control HDC 87
Hills 122
Holders for cups 111
Home address 140
"Home address" in
navigation 141
Homepage BMW 4
Hood 221
Hooks for shopping
bags 115, 116
Horn 10, 11
Hotel function, refer to
Locking or unlocking
separately 34
Hot exhaust system 121
"Hour memo" 80
"House number" in
destination entry 133
Hydraulic brake assist, refer to
Dynamic Brake Control
DBC 86
Hydroplaning 121
I
IBOC, refer to High Definition
Radio 163
Ice warning, refer to Outside
temperature
warning 71
ID3 tag, refer to Information
about the track 171
Identification marks
– Run-Flat Tires 219
– tire coding 217
iDrive 16
– adjusting brightness 84
– assistance window 20
– automatic climate
control 101
– changing language 84
– changing units of measure
and display format 76
– confirming selection or
entry 19
– controls 16
– displays, menus 17
– menu guidance 17
– operating principle 16
– overview 16
– selecting a menu item 19
– setting the date and time 79
– start menu 17
– status information 20
– switching menu pages 19
– symbols 18
iDrive operating principle 16
Ignition 56
– switched off 56
– switched on 56
Ignition key, refer to Remote
control with integrated
key 28
Ignition key position 1, refer to
Radio readiness 56
Ignition key position 2, refer to
Ignition on 56
Ignition lock 56
i menu 18
Imprint 2
Indicator and warning
lamps 13
– Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 92
Individual air distribution 101
Individually programmable
buttons on steering
wheel 50
Inflation pressure, refer to Tire
inflation pressure 208
Inflation pressure monitoring,
refer to Tire Pressure
Monitor TPM 90
Information
– on another location 136
– on country 136
– on current position 136
– on destination location 136
Information menu, refer to
i menu 18
"Information on
destination" 138
"Info sources" 77
Initializing
– active steering 93
– after power failure 234
– compass, refer to
Calibrating 108
– Flat Tire Monitor FTM 89
– glass roof 40
– panorama glass roof 42
"Input map" 135
Installation location
– CD changer 173
– navigation DVD drive 128
– telephone 110
Instructions for navigation
system, refer to Voice
instructions 146
Instrument cluster 12
Instrument lighting 99
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Everything from A-Z
260
Instrument panel, refer to
Cockpit 10
Integrated key 28
Integrated universal remote
control 106
Interesting destination for
navigation 136
"Interim time" 84
Interior lamps 99
– remote control 30
Interior motion sensor 36
Interior rearview mirror 50
– automatic dimming
feature 50
– compass 108
Interlock, refer to Disengaging
the remote control 58
Intermittent mode of the
wipers 61
J
Jacking points 233
Joystick, refer to iDrive 16
Jumpering, refer to Jump
starting 236
Jump starting 236
K
Key, refer to Integrated key/
remote control 28
Keyless go, refer to
Convenient access 36
Keyless opening and closing,
refer to Convenient
access 36
Key Memory, refer to Personal
Profile 28
Kick-down 59
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 59
Knock control 207
L
Lamps
– automatic headlamp
control 96
– parking lamps/low beams 96
Lamps and bulbs, replacing
bulbs 229
"Language / Units" 76
"Language / Units" in
navigation 129, 146
"Language" on the Control
Display 84
"Languages" in
navigation 129, 146
Lap-and-shoulder belt, refer
to Safety belts 48
Lashing eyes, refer to
Securing cargo 124
Last destinations, refer to
Destination list 137
"Last seat pos." 48
LATCH child-restraint fixing
system 53
LED hand lamp 110
LED Light-emitting
diodes 229
Length, refer to
Dimensions 243
License plate lamp, replacing
bulb 233
Light-emitting diodes
LED 229
Lighter 111
– connecting electrical
appliances 112
"Lighting" 61
Lighting
– instruments 99
– lamps and bulbs 229
– vehicle, refer to Lamps 96
Light-metal alloy wheels, care,
refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
Light switch 96
"Limit" 83
Limit, refer to Speed limit 83
Load securing equipment,
refer to Securing cargo 124
Lock buttons, doors, refer to
Locking 32
Locking
– adjusting confirmation
signal 31
– from inside 32
– from outside 30
– without remote control, refer
to Convenient access 36
Locking and unlocking doors
– confirmation signals 31
– from inside 32
– from outside 29
Low-beam headlamps 96
– automatic
96
Low beams
– replacing bulbs 229
Lower back support, refer to
Lumbar support 45
Luggage compartment lid 33
– convenient access 37
– emergency operation, refer
to Opening manually 33
– emergency release 34
– locking or unlocking
separately 34
– opening from inside 33
– opening from outside 33
– opening manually 33
– remote control 30
Luggage rack, refer to Roof-
mounted luggage rack 124
Lumbar support 45
M
M+S tires, refer to Winter
tires 220
Maintenance, refer to Service
Booklet
Maintenance system 226
Malfunction
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 60
– luggage compartment lid/
tailgate 33
– tires 90
Malfunction warnings, refer to
Check Control 81
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
261
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Manual mode, automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 59
"Manual" on the radio 161
Manual operation
– door lock 31
– driver's door 31
– fuel filler door 206
– glass roof 40
– luggage compartment lid/
tailgate 33
– panorama glass roof 42
– transmission lock, automatic
transmission 60
Manual transmission 58
Map
– changing scale 145
– destination entry 135
"Map direction of travel" 145
"Map facing north" 145
Master key, refer to Remote
control with integrated
key 28
Maximum cooling 102
Maximum speed
– with winter tires 220
Measurements, refer to
Dimensions 243
Memory, refer to Seat and
mirror memory 47
Memory keys,
programmable 21
MENU button 16
Menus
– Control Display 17
Menus, refer to iDrive 16
Message list, traffic
information 148
Microfilter
– BMW Maintenance
System 226
– for automatic climate
control 104
Microfilter/activated-charcoal
filter
– BMW Maintenance
System 226
Microphone
– telephone 14
– voice input 14
Mirror dimming feature 50
Mirrors 49
– automatic curb monitor 49
– exterior mirrors 49
– heating 49
– interior rearview mirror 50
– memory, refer to Seat and
mirror memory 47
"Missed calls" 190
Missed calls 190
Mobile phone
– accepted calls 190
– adjusting volume 187
– calling
189
– ending call 189
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest 110
– missed calls 190
– operation via iDrive 187
– redialing 190
– refer to separate Owner's
Manual
– Top 8 190
– touch tone dialing 192
Mobile phone, installation
location, refer to Center
armrest 110
Mobile phone, refer to the
separate Owner's Manual
Modifications, technical, refer
to For your own safety 5
Monitor, refer to iDrive
controls 16
Monitoring system for tire
pressures, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 89
"Monitor on / off" 51
Most recent mobile phone
numbers 190
MP3, refer to Compressed
audio files 169
Multifunctional steering
wheel, refer to Buttons on
the steering wheel 11
Multifunction switch
– refer to Turn signals/
headlamp flasher 60
– refer to Wiper system 61
Multimedia screen, refer to
iDrive 16
Music tracks, refer to
Tracks 170
"Mute on / off" 51
N
"Navigation" 130, 136
Navigation announcements,
refer to Switching voice
instructions on/off 146
Navigation drive, location 128
Navigation DVD 128
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Everything from A-Z
262
Navigation system 128
– address book 138
– changing a route 147
– destination entry 130
– destination guidance in
assistance window 128
– destination list 137
– displaying current
position 151
– entering a destination
manually 130, 134
– last destinations 137
– navigation DVD 128
– opening 130
– route display 144
– route list 146
– searching for a special
destination 136
– selecting destination using
information 136
– selecting destination via
map 135
– selecting route criteria 141
– starting destination
guidance 143
– switching off, refer to
Terminating/continuing
destination guidance 143
– terminating/continuing
destination guidance 143
– voice instructions 146
– volume adjustment 147
"Navigation voice
instructions" 129
"Navigation voice
instructions" via buttons on
the steering wheel 51
Neck support, refer to Head
restraints 45
Nets, refer to Storage
compartments 110
"New address" in
navigation 139
"New destination" 131, 135
"New route" 147
New tires 219
"Next entertainment
source" 51
North-facing map 145
Nozzles 100
Number of cylinders, refer to
Engine data 242
Nylon rope, refer to Tow
rope 239
O
OBD socket, refer to Socket
for On-Board Diagnosis 227
Octane ratings, refer to Fuel
specifications 207
Odometer 71
Oil, refer to Engine oil 222
Oil consumption 222
Oil level 222
Old batteries, refer to
Disposal 234
"On a new destination" in
navigation 137
"Onboard info" 74
Onboard tool kit 228
"On destination" 137
"On location" 137
Opening and closing
– convenient access 36
– from inside 32
– from outside 29
– using the door lock 31
– via the remote control 29
Operation by voice for mobile
phone 193
– adjusting volume 194
– canceling 193
– correcting phone
number 194
– dialing phone number 194
– placing a call 194
– redialing 194
– voice commands 193
– voice phone book 194
"Options" 201
Orientation menu, refer to
Start menu 17
Outlets
– refer to Ventilation 103
Output, refer to Engine
data 242
Outside-air mode
– automatic climate
control 102
Outside-temperature
display 71
– changing units of
measure 76
– in computer 76
Outside temperature
warning 71
Overheated engine, refer to
Coolant temperature 72
Overriding selector lever
lock 60
P
Panorama glass roof 40
– closing after electrical
malfunction 42
– comfort position 41
– convenient operation 30
– initializing 42
– opening, closing 41
– pinch protection system 41
– power failure 42
– raising 41
– remote control 30
Park assistant, refer to Park
Distance Control 85
"Parked car operation" 104
"Parked car ventilation" 104
Parked car ventilation 104
– activating switch-on
times 105
– preselecting switch-on
times 104
– switching on and off
directly 104
Parking
– vehicle 57
Parking aid, refer to PDC Park
Distance Control 85
Parking brake 57
– indicator lamp 58
Parking lamps 96
Parking lamps/low beams 96
– replacing bulbs 230
Partition net 114
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
263
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Passenger-side mirror tilt
function 49
"Pathway lighting" 97
Pathway lighting 97
"PDC" 85
PDC Park Distance Control 85
Personal Profile 28
"Perspective" 145
Phone book 187
Phone numbers
– deleting from phone
book 191
– dialing 189
– most recent numbers 190
– selecting in phone book 190
– Top 8 190
Pinch protection system
– glass roof, electric 40
– panorama glass roof 41
– windows 39
Placing a call, refer to
telephone owner's manual
"Play" for satellite radio 167
Pollen
– refer to Microfilter/activated-
charcoal filter for automatic
climate control 104
Position
– displaying 151
– saving, refer to Storing
current position 139
Power failure 234
Power windows 38
– safety switch 39
Power windows, refer to
Windows 38
"Presets", displaying with the
radio 160
"Presets" for satellite
radio 167
Pressure, tires 208
Pressure monitoring, tires 89
– Flat Tire Monitor 89
Pressure monitoring of tires,
refer to Tire Pressure
Monitor TPM 90
"Profile" 203
Programmable buttons on the
steering wheel 11
Programmable memory
keys 21
Protection function, refer to
Pinch protection system
– glass roof, electric 40
– panorama glass roof 41
– windows 39
Providing medical assistance,
refer to First add pouch 236
Puncture
– Flat Tire Monitor 89
R
Radio
– autostore 161
– controls 156
– High Definition Radio 163
– listening to stations 160
– regional programs 163
– sampling stations 161
– satellite radio 166
– selecting a
waveband 156, 160
– selecting the frequency
manually 161
– station search 161
– stations with best
reception 161
– storing stations 162
– switching on/off 156
– tone control 157
– volume 157
Radio position, refer to Radio
readiness 56
Radio readiness 56
– switched off 56
– switched on 56
Radio-remote key, refer to
Remote control with
integrated key 28
Rain sensor 61
"Random", refer to Random
play 172
"Random all" for audio
mode 173
"Random directory" for audio
mode 173
Random play 172
"RDS" Radio Data
System 163
Reading lamps 99
Rear lamps, refer to Tail
lamps 231
– replacing bulb 232
Rear seat backrest,
folding 114
Rear seats
– adjusting head restraints 46
– folding 114
– folding down
backrests 113, 114
– folding head restraint down
and up 46
Rear turn signals
– replacing bulb 232
Rear ventilation 104
Rearview mirror, refer to
Mirrors 49
Rear window
– cleaning 62
– opening 35
Rear window blind, refer to
Roller sun blinds 109
Rear window defroster 103
Rear window safety switch 39
Rear window wiper 62
– changing rear wiper
blade 229
"Received calls" 190
Receiving level of mobile
phone, refer to Status
information 20
Recirculated-air mode 102
Recirculation of air, refer to
Recirculated-air mode 102
Reclining seat, refer to
Backrest 44
Recording times, refer to
Stopwatch 83
"Redial" for mobile phone 190
Refueling 206
Releasing
– hood 221
Remaining distance, refer to
Cruising range 73
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Everything from A-Z
264
Remote control 28
– battery renewal 38
– convenient access 36
– garage door opener 106
– luggage compartment lid 30
– malfunction 31, 38
– removing from the ignition
lock 56
– service data 226
– tailgate 30
"Repeat directory" for audio
mode 172
"Repeat" for audio mode 172
"Repeat track" for audio
mode 172
Replacement remote
control 28
Replacing bulbs, refer to
Lamps and bulbs 229
Replacing tires 219
Replacing tires, refer to New
wheels and tires 219
Reporting safety defects 6
Reserve warning, refer to Fuel
gauge 72
"Reset" 89, 91
Reset, refer to Resetting tone
settings 159
"Reset" for stopwatch 84
"Reset" for tone settings 159
Residual heat 103
Restraint systems
– for children 52
– refer to Safety belts 48
Reverse
– CD changer 173
– CD player 173
Reverse gear
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 59
– manual transmission 58
Road map 145
"Roadside Assistance" 198
Roadside
Assistance 198, 235
Roadside parking lamps 98
– replacing bulbs 230
Roadworthiness test, refer to
Service requirements 76
Roller blind
– sun blinds 109
Roof load capacity 245
Roof-mounted luggage
rack 124
"Roomsound", refer to Tone
control 158
Rope, refer to Tow-starting,
towing away
239
Rotary/pushbutton, refer to
iDrive 16
Route 141
– arrow display 144
– changing 147
– display 144
– displaying streets and
towns/cities 146
– displaying town 146
– list 146
– map display 145
– selecting 141
– selecting criteria 141
RSC Runflat System
Component, refer to Run-
Flat Tires 219
Rubber parts, refer to Caring
for your vehicle brochure
Runflat System Component
RSC, refer to Run-Flat
Tires 219
Run-Flat Tires 219
– continuing driving with a
damaged tire 90
– flat tire 90
– Flat Tire Monitor 90
– new tires 219
– replacing 219
– tire inflation pressure 208
– winter tires 220
S
Safety-belt height
adjustment 48
Safety belts 48
– damage 49
– indicator/warning lamp 48
– reminder 48
– sitting safely 43
Safety belts, care, refer to
Caring for your vehicle
brochure
Safety systems
– airbags 94
– Antilock Brake System
ABS 86
– brake system 86
– driving stability control
systems 86
– Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 86
– safety belts 48
Safety tires, refer to Run-Flat
Tires 219
"SAT" 156, 166
Satellite radio 166
– displaying additional
information 167
– enabling 166
– selecting channel 167
– storing channel 167
Saving fuel 120
"Scan"
– sampling radio stations 161
– sampling tracks on CD 171
Scan
– CD changer 171
– CD player 171
– radio 161
"Scan all" for audio mode 171
"Scan directory" for audio
mode 171
Screen, refer to iDrive
controls 16
Screw thread for tow
fitting 238
SDARS, refer to Satellite
radio 166
Seat adjustment
– electric 44
– mechanical 44
Seat and mirror memory 47
Seat belt reminder, refer to
'Fasten safety belts'
reminder 48
Seat heating 47
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
265
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Seats 44
– adjusting electrically 44
– adjusting the seats 44
– heating 47
– memory, refer to Seat and
mirror memory 47
– saving a setting, refer to Seat
and mirror memory 47
– sitting safely 43
Securing cargo 117
Securing the vehicle
– from inside 32
– from outside 29
"Select as
destination" 137, 201
"Select current speed" 83
Selecting a country for
navigation 131
Selecting an audio source 156
Selecting distance for active
cruise control 66
Selecting menu items 19
Selecting new scale for
navigation 145
Selector lever
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 59
Selector lever lock, refer to
Changing selector lever
positions, shiftlock 59
Selector lever positions
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 59
Service, refer to Roadside
Assistance 235
Service car, refer to Roadside
Assistance 235
Service data in the remote
control 226
"Service Info" 77, 199, 223
Service Interval Display, refer
to Condition Based Service
CBS 226
"Service Request" 192, 199
Service requirement display,
refer to Condition Based
Service CBS 226
"Service
requirements" 77, 199, 223
Service requirements 76
"Set date" 81
"Set time" 80
"Settings" 203
Settings
– changing settings on the
Control Display 84
– clock, 12h/24h mode 80
– date format
81
– language 84
Settings and information 75
"Settings" for unlocking 29
Settings menu, refer to
imenu17
Setting times, refer to
Preselecting switch-on
times 104
Shifting gears
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 59
– manual transmission 58
Shiftlock
– automatic transmission,
refer to Changing selector
lever positions 59
Short commands for the voice
command system 247
Shortest route in navigation,
refer to Selecting route 141
"Short route" in
navigation 141
"Show current position" 136
"Show destination
position" 136
Shuffled, refer to Random
– CD changer 172
– CD player 172
Side airbags 94
Side window blind, refer to
Roller sun blinds 109
Side windows, refer to
Windows 38
Signal horn, refer to
Horn 10, 11
Sitting safely 43
– with airbags 43
– with head restraint 43
– with safety belts 43
Ski bag 117
Sliding/tilt sunroof
– refer to Panorama glass
roof 40
Sliding/tilt sunroof, refer to
Glass roof, electric 39
Slot for remote control 56
Smokers' package, refer to
Ashtray 111
Snap-in adapter, refer to
Center armrest storage
compartment 110
Socket, On-Board Diagnosis
OBD 227
Socket, refer to Connecting
electrical appliances 112
Song search, refer to Playing a
track 171
SOS, refer to Sending an
Emergency Request 235
Sound output for
entertainment on/off 156
Spare fuses, 234
Spare fuses, refer to
Fuses
234
Speaking, refer to Voice
instructions from navigation
system 146
Speed
– Run-Flat Tires 90
– with winter tires 220
Speed-dependent volume
control 157
Speed limit 83
Speed limit warning, refer to
Speed limit 83
Speedometer 12
"Speed volume", refer to Tone
control 158
Split rear seat backrest, refer
to Expanding the cargo
bay 114
Spray nozzles, refer to
Cleaning windshield and
headlamps 62
Stability control, refer to
Driving stability control
systems 86
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Everything from A-Z
266
Start/stop button 56
– starting the engine 57
– switching off the engine 57
"Start guidance" 133
Starting, refer to Starting the
engine 57
Starting assistance, refer to
Jump starting 236
Starting difficulties
– jump starting 236
Starting the engine
– start/stop button 56
Start menu 17
"Start service" 198
"Start Service" for BMW
Assist 200
"State / Province" in
destination entry 131
Station
– refer to Radio 160
"Status" 77
Status of this Owner's Manual
at time of printing 5
Steering wheel 50
– adjustment 50
– buttons on steering
wheel 11
– freely programmable
buttons 50
– lock 56
– locking with convenient
access 37
– programmable buttons 50
"Steering wheel buttons" 51
Steering with variable ratio,
refer to Active steering 93
Steptronic, refer to Automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 58
"Stopwatch" 84
Stopwatch 83
Storage compartments 110
Storage nets 115
"Store" for satellite radio 168
"Store in address book" in
navigation 139
"Store" on the radio 162
Storing current position 139
Storing radio stations 162
Storing seat positions, refer to
Seat and mirror memory 47
Storing tires 220
Stowage, refer to Storage
compartments 110
"Street" in destination
entry 133
Summer tires, refer to Wheels
and tires 208
Sun blinds 109
Surface ice, refer to Outside
temperature warning 71
"Surround Settings", refer to
Tone control 158
Switches, refer to Cockpit 10
Switching off
– engine 57
Switching off the engine
– start/stop button 56
Switching on
– audio 156
– CD changer 156
– CD player 156
– radio 156
Switching on the hour
signal 80
Switching the cooling function
on and off 103
Switch-on times of parked car
ventilation, preselecting 104
Symbols 4
– navigation system 150
– status information 20
– traffic info for navigation
system 147
T
Tachometer 71
Tailgate
– convenient access 37
– emergency operation, refer
to Opening manually 33
– opening from inside 33
– opening from outside 33
– opening manually 33
– remote control 30
Tail lamps 231
– replacing bulb 232
Tank contents, refer to
Capacities 246
Technical data 242
– capacities 246
– dimensions 243
Technical modifications, refer
to For your own safety 5
Telematics, refer to
TeleService, BMW
Assist 197
Telephone
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest 110
– refer to separate Owner's
Manual
Telephone, refer to Mobile
phone 182
"Telephone list" 51
TeleService 199
Temperature
– automatic climate
control 101
– changing unit of measure 76
– coolant, refer to Coolant
temperature 72
Temperature display
– outside temperature 71
– outside temperature
warning 71
– setting the units 76
Tempomat, refer to Cruise
control 63
Tensioning straps, refer to
Securing cargo 124
"Terminate services" 202
"Text language" 84
"Theater" for Tone
control 158
The individual vehicle 5
Third brake lamp, refer to
Center brake lamp 233
Through-loading system 113
Through-loading system,
refer to Expanding the cargo
bay 114
Tilt alarm sensor 36
Tilt function, passenger-side
mirror 49
"Time" 80
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
267
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
"Time / Date" 79, 80, 81
"Time format" 80
Timer, refer to Preselecting
switch-on times 104
"Timer 2" for parked car
ventilation/heating 105
"Timer 1" for parked car
ventilation/heating 105
Tire inflation pressure 208
– loss 90, 91
Tire pressure monitoring,
refer to Flat Tire Monitor 89
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 90
– resetting the system 91
– system limitations 90
– warning lamp 92
Tire puncture, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 90
Tire Quality Grading 217
Tires
– age 217, 218
– air loss 92
– breaking in 120
– changing, refer to Changing
wheels 233
– condition 218
– damage 218
– inflation pressure 208
– labels 217
– minimum tread depth 218
– new wheels and tires 219
– pressure monitoring, refer to
Flat Tire Monitor 89
– pressure monitoring, refer to
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 90
– puncture 90
– replacing 219
– Run-Flat 219
– size 217
– storage 220
– tread depth 218
– wear indicators, refer to
Minimum tread depth 218
– wheel/tire combination, refer
to Correct wheels and
tires 219
– winter tires 220
TMC station, refer to Traffic
information 147
"Tone" 157
Tone in audio mode
– adjusting 157
– middle setting 159
Tools, refer to Onboard tool
kit 228
"Top 8" for mobile phone 190
Torque, refer to Engine
data 242
Touch tone dialing 192
Tow bar 238
Tow fitting 238
– screw thread 238
Tow fittings for tow-starting
and towing away 238
Towing 237
– car with automatic
transmission 237
– methods 238
Towing and tow-starting 237
Town/city for destination 131
"Town / City" in destination
entry 131
Tow rope 239
Tow-starting 237, 239
"TPM" 91
TPM, refer to Tire Pressure
Monitor 90
Tracks
– random play sequence 172
– sampling, Scan 171
– searching for 171
Track width, refer to
Dimensions 243
Traction control, refer to DSC
Dynamic Stability
Control 86
Traffic information for
navigation
– calling up 148
– display on route map 149
– during destination
guidance 150
– switching on/off 147
– symbols 150
"Traffic Info settings" 148
Traffic jam
– displaying traffic
information 147
– driving around 150
Transmission
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 58
– manual transmission 58
– overriding selector lever lock
for automatic transmission
with Steptronic 60
Transmission interlock
– refer to Changing selector
lever position 59
– refer to P Park 59
Transporting children
safely 52
Transport securing devices,
refer to Securing cargo 124
Tread depth, refer to Minimum
tire tread
218
Treble, refer to Treble and
bass 157
Treble, tone control 157
"Trip computer" 74
Trip computer 74
Trip-distance counter, refer to
Trip odometer 71
"Triple turn signal" 61
Triple turn signal activation 61
Trip odometer 71
Trunk, refer to Cargo bay 114
Trunk lid 33
Trunk lid, refer to Luggage
compartment lid/tailgate 33
Turning circle, refer to
Dimensions 243
Turn signal indicators
– indicator/warning lamp 12
– replacing bulbs 231
– triple turn signal 61
Turn signals 60
Tying down loads, refer to
Cargo loading 124
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Everything from A-Z
268
U
Underbody protection, refer to
Caring for your vehicle
brochure
Uniform Tire Quality Grading/
UTQR 217
"Units" 76
Units
– average consumption 76
– temperature 76
Universal garage door opener,
refer to Integrated universal
remote control 106
Universal mobile phone
preparation package, refer
to separate Owner's Manual
Universal remote control 106
Unlatching, refer to
Unlocking 36
"Unlock button" 30
Unlocking
– from inside 32
– from outside 29
– luggage compartment lid 37
– tailgate 37
– without remote control, refer
to Convenient access 36
"Update services" 201
USB-audio interface 176
"USB" for audio
mode 175, 177
V
Vehicle
– battery 233
– breaking in 120
– care, refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
– cargo loading 123
– Identification Number, refer
to Engine compartment 222
– measurements, refer to
Dimensions 243
– parking 57
– washing, refer to Caring for
your vehicle brochure
– weight 245
"Vehicle / Tires" for
unlocking 30
Vehicle decommissioning
– refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
Vehicle jack 233
Vehicle position, refer to
Displaying current
position 151
Ventilation 103
– draft-free 103
– in the rear 104
Ventilation, refer to
Climate 100
Ventilation while at a
standstill 104
Vents, refer to Ventilation 103
"Vent settings" 101
Voice commands
– overview 23
– short commands 247
Voice instructions from
navigation system 146
– muting 51, 147
– repeating 51, 147
– switching on/off 146
– volume 147
Voice phone book 194
Volume 156
– audio sources 156
– fuel tank, refer to
Capacities 246
– mobile phone 187
– speed-dependent
control 157
– voice instructions 147
Volume distribution
– front/rear 157
– left/right 157
W
Warning and indicator
lamps 13
Warning messages, refer to
Check Control 81
Warning triangle 236
Washer fluid 62
– content of the reservoir 63
Washer fluid reservoir 62
Washing the car, refer to
Caring for your vehicle
brochure
Waste tray, refer to
Ashtray 111
Water on roads, refer to
Driving through water 122
Waveband with the radio 160
Wear indicators in tires, refer
to Minimum tread depth 218
Weights 245
Welcome lamps 96
"Welcome light" 97
Wheel/tire combination, refer
to Correct wheels and
tires 219
Wheelbase, refer to
Dimensions 243
Wheels, new 219
Wheels and tires 208
Width, refer to
Dimensions 243
Windows 38
– convenient operation 30
– opening, closing 38
– pinch protection system 39
– rear window 35
– safety switch 39
Windows, indicator on Control
Display 16
Windshield
– cleaning 62
Windshield wash 61
– filling capacity, reservoir 246
– nozzles 62
– rear window 62
– reservoir for washer fluid 62
– washer fluid 62
Windshield wiper blades,
changing 228
Windshield wipers, blades,
care, refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
Windshield wipers, refer to
Wiper system 61
Winter tires 220
– setting speed limit 83
– storage 220
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Reference
269
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Wiper blade replacement 228
Wiper system 61
"With highways" in
navigation 141
Wooden trim, refer to Caring
for your vehicle brochure
Word-matching principle for
navigation 142
Work in the engine
compartment 221
Wrench/screwdriver, refer to
Onboard tool kit 228
X
xDrive 87
Xenon lamps
– replacing bulb 229
Y
Your individual vehicle
– settings, refer to Personal
Profile 28
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
01 41 0 014 254 ue iDrive
*BL001425400C*
The Ultimate
Driving Machine
More about BMW
bmwusa.com
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 0 014 254 - © 08/07 BMW AG
